Vd8 Manual Us

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 216

VivaDesigner

User Manual
Contents

Contents
1 General Information
General Information..........................................................................2
About this manual............................................................................2
Delivery & Updates ........................................................................................2
Prior knowledge ............................................................................................2
Conventions..................................................................................................2
Services ..........................................................................................3
Program Help ...............................................................................................4
Additional Services ........................................................................................4
Legal notices ...................................................................................5
VIVA Trademarks ...........................................................................................5
Trademarks of other manufacturers ..................................................................5
VIVA Software License Agreement ......................................................6
2 Installation
Preparing the Installation.................................................................14
Step 1: The correct installation program for your operating system.......................14
Step 2: Unpacking the installation program......................................................14
Step 3: Installation rights................................................................................14
Step 4: Licensing the software (chargeable versions only)....................................14
Step 5: Hardware protection............................................................................15
Installation on Microsoft Windows.....................................................15
Program installation........................................................................15
Step 1: Unpack the installation program............................................................15
Step 2: Start the installation program...............................................................15
Step 3: Select the installation language.............................................................15
Step 4: Follow the installation instructions.........................................................15
Step 5: Start the program...............................................................................16
Step 6: Choose License File..............................................................................16
Customize your Installation...............................................................16
Uninstalling or deleting the program.................................................16
Un-installation with the VIVA program.............................................................16
Un-installation with the operating system.........................................................16
Installation on Mac OS X...................................................................16
Step 1: Unpack the installation program............................................................16
Step 2: Copy the program...............................................................................17
Step 3: Install the QuickLook module................................................................17
Step 4: Start the program...............................................................................17
Step 5: Choose License File..............................................................................17
Customize Installation......................................................................17
Update an installed program version..................................................17
Uninstalling or deleting the program.................................................17
Deleting on Mac OSX (10.5).............................................................................17
I Deleting on Mac OS X (10.6 or newer)................................................................17
Contents

Installation on Linux........................................................................18
Step 1: Choose the installation package.............................................................18
Step 2: Unpack the installation program...........................................................18
Step 3: Installation with the Terminal...............................................................18
Step 4: Start the program...............................................................................19
Step 5: Choose License File..............................................................................19
Update License Key..........................................................................19
Step 1: Start the program................................................................................19
Step 2: Update License...................................................................................19
Step 3: Follow the instructions.........................................................................19
Automated Installation (for System Administrators only) ......................19
Preferences file.............................................................................................20
Create Preferences file:..................................................................................20
Windows Registry..........................................................................................21
License file...................................................................................................21
Paths for the license file in the user folder:........................................................21
Paths for the license file in the program folder:..................................................21
VCP file.......................................................................................................22
3 User Interface
The Document Window....................................................................24
Menus...........................................................................................24
Standard Dialog Boxes & Palettes.......................................................25
Dialog Construction and Behavior....................................................................25
Palette Construction and Behavior...................................................................25
Dialog and Palette Elements...........................................................................25
Entry Fields..................................................................................................25
Checkboxes and Radio Buttons.......................................................................27
Pop-Up Menus.............................................................................................27
Command areas...........................................................................................27
Lists and Buttons..........................................................................................27
Program Palettes............................................................................28
System Dialog Boxes........................................................................29
Errors, Warnings and Queries............................................................29
4 Working with Documents
Introduction...................................................................................31
Open Document..............................................................................31
Open Document with Open command:..............................................................31
Closing Documents..........................................................................31
Close a document with the close box:...............................................................32
Close document with the Close command:........................................................32
Revert to saved document................................................................32
Creating new documents.................................................................32
Create a new document:................................................................................32
Summary Document Creation:..........................................................34
II
Contents

Saving Documents..........................................................................34
Save a new document:...................................................................................35
Save a new document with Preview:................................................................35
Save an existing document:...........................................................................36
Save a document with a different name:..........................................................36
Document views.............................................................................36
Hide and show palettes..................................................................................36
Selecting Open documents.............................................................................37
Stack and Tile Windows (multiple documents)..................................................37
Tile a single document window.......................................................................38
Document zoom...........................................................................................38
Select zoom scale through menu commands:....................................................39
Zoom with Zoom tool:...................................................................................39
Modify zoom factor with the Zoom factor field:.................................................39
Presentation Mode........................................................................................39
Activate Presentation Mode:...........................................................................40
Leave Presentation Mode:..............................................................................40
5 Working with Objects
Introduction..................................................................................42
Creating objects ............................................................................43
Creating closed objects .................................................................................43
Create a rectangle or square interactively: .......................................................43
Create a rectangle/square automatically: ........................................................44
Create a curved rectangle: ............................................................................44
Create an oval/circle interactively: .................................................................44
Create a polygon: ........................................................................................45
Create line objects .......................................................................................45
Create a simple straight line: .........................................................................45
Create an orthogonal line: .............................................................................46
Create a multiple line: ..................................................................................46
Summary Creating Objects ..............................................................46
Selecting objects............................................................................48
Select objects with a mouse-click: ..................................................................48
Select objects through dragging: ...................................................................48
Select all objects: .........................................................................................48
Deselect all selected objects: .........................................................................49
Summary Selecting objects ..............................................................49
Positioning objects .........................................................................50
Move objects ...............................................................................................51
Move object with the mouse: ..........................................................................51
Move/nudge object with the keyboard: ............................................................51
Move objects with the Module palette: .............................................................51
Move objects with the Object Settings dialog: ...................................................52
Changing object hierarchy ............................................................................52
Change object hierarchy: ..............................................................................52
Object alignment .........................................................................................53
Align objects with menu commands: ..............................................................53
Align objects with the Align/Distribute dialog: .................................................54
Align objects with the Module palette: ............................................................54
Align objects with the Object Settings dialog: ...................................................55
III
Contents

Rotate and Mirror .........................................................................................55


Rotate or mirror an object Interactively: ..........................................................56
Rotate/Mirror object precisely with Object Settings: ..........................................56
Rotate and mirror objects precisely with the palette: .........................................56
Skew objects ...............................................................................................57
Skew Object with Module Palette: ...................................................................57
Skew Object with Object Settings dialog: .........................................................57
Basic commands ............................................................................57
Delete objects .............................................................................................58
Delete objects: ............................................................................................58
Cut objects .................................................................................................58
Cut objects: ................................................................................................58
Copy objects ...............................................................................................58
Copy objects: ..............................................................................................59
Pasting Objects............................................................................................59
Paste objects: ..............................................................................................59
Duplicate objects .........................................................................................59
Duplicate objects: ........................................................................................60
Split objects ................................................................................................60
Split objects: ...............................................................................................60
Lock objects .................................................................................................61
Lock objects: ................................................................................................61
Unlock objects: ............................................................................................61
Protect objects .............................................................................................61
Protect objects: ...........................................................................................62
Cancel protection: .......................................................................................62
Modifying object properties.............................................................62
Resizing objects interactively .........................................................................62
Resize/scale rectangle and oval interactively: ..................................................63
Resize polygons and lines interactively: ..........................................................63
Resize curves and Bézier objects: ....................................................................63
Delete sizing handles ....................................................................................64
Delete sizing and control handles: ..................................................................64
Create a half-circle: .....................................................................................64
Add sizing handles ......................................................................................64
Add a sizing handle: ....................................................................................64
Automatic Scaling ........................................................................................65
Scale objects and groups proportionally with the dialog: ...................................65
Summary Resizing objects ...............................................................66
Object fill .....................................................................................66
Fill Color, Density, Transparency ....................................................................66
Change fill color with the Module palette: ........................................................66
Change fill color with the Object Settings: ........................................................67
Lines and Frames ...........................................................................67
Line Color, Shade, Transparency .....................................................................67
Change Line color with the Module palette: ......................................................67
Change Line Color with the Object Settings: .....................................................68
Change Line/Frame Width .............................................................................68
Change Line Width with the Module palette: ....................................................68
Change Line width with the Object Settings: .....................................................69
Change Frame type ......................................................................................69
Change Line Style with the Module palette: ......................................................69
Change Line type with the Object Settings: ......................................................69
IV
Contents

Change Line ends .........................................................................................70


Change Line ends with the Module palette: ......................................................70
Change Line ends with the Object Settings: ......................................................70
Change Radius ............................................................................................70
Change radius with the Module palette: ..........................................................70
Change radius with the Object Settings: ...........................................................71
Using Guide Objects ........................................................................71
Create Guide Objects automatically ................................................................72
Create Guide object with Ruler: ......................................................................72
Create Guide Objects manually .......................................................................73
Create Guide object manually: .......................................................................73
Select Guide Objects .....................................................................................73
Guide Objects Selectable On/Off: ....................................................................73
Show Guide objects ......................................................................................73
Hide/Show Guide objects: .............................................................................74
Magnetism .................................................................................................74
Guide Objects Magnetic On/Off: .....................................................................74
Change Snap to Distance for Guide objects: .....................................................74
Summary Using Guide Objects .........................................................75
Working with Alias Objects...............................................................75
Creating Alias objects ...................................................................................76
Create an Alias object:...................................................................................76
Duplicate objects as Alias objects onto following pages:.....................................76
Duplicate objects as Alias objects by inserting pages:........................................77
Find Original................................................................................................77
Find Original:...............................................................................................77
Change Alias into a Copy...............................................................................78
Change Alias into a Copy:..............................................................................78
Flexible Alias Content....................................................................................78
Create a Flexible Alias Text and/or Picture Object:..............................................78
Cancel the flexible content of an Alias Object:...................................................79
Summary Alias Objects....................................................................79
Object Grouping ............................................................................79
Create and recognize a Group ........................................................................80
Create a Group: ...........................................................................................80
Creating a Group Hierarchy: ..........................................................................80
Create a Group with an Alias object: ...............................................................80
Create Alias of a Group: ................................................................................80
Select objects in a group ...............................................................................81
Select object in a group: ................................................................................81
Ungroup .....................................................................................................81
Summary Object Grouping ...............................................................81
Working with Layers........................................................................82
Layer Management.......................................................................................83
Object Management......................................................................................83
New Layers....................................................................................84
Create New Layer:.........................................................................................84
Remove Layers...............................................................................84
Remove Layer:.............................................................................................84
V
Manage Layers...............................................................................84
Contents

Edit Layers...................................................................................................84
Edit Layer:...................................................................................................84
Switch Layers on and off................................................................................85
Layer Hierarchy............................................................................................85
Change Layer Hierarchy:................................................................................85
Manage Objects on Layers................................................................85
Create an object on the new layer:..................................................................86
Move the object to Layer 1:.............................................................................86
Duplicating, Copying and Pasting Objects on Layers..........................................86
Copy an object and paste to the active layer:....................................................86
Cut an object and paste to the active layer:......................................................87
Remove an individual object:.........................................................................87
Remove several objects from two or more layers:...............................................87
Naming objects on layers..............................................................................88
Name objects on layers:................................................................................88
Grouping Objects on Layers...........................................................................88
Managing and editing grouped objects on layers.............................................88
Changing attribute of a grouped object:..........................................................88
Tips & Tricks for working with layers..................................................89
6 Working with Text
Creating Text objects.......................................................................91
Create a new text object interactively...............................................................91
Create a new Text object with Menu/shortcut keys:.............................................91
Convert an existing object into a Text object:....................................................92
Create a Text object by creating an Alias object with variable content:.................92
Summary Creating Text Objects......................................................................93
Text mode.....................................................................................93
Activate/leave Text mode..............................................................................93
Activate Text mode:......................................................................................93
Activate Text mode in object groups:...............................................................93
Leave Text mode: .........................................................................................94
Summary Activate/Leave Text mode................................................................94
Entering text..................................................................................94
Entering and correcting text..........................................................................94
The insertion point (cursor)............................................................................94
Summary cursor...........................................................................................95
Entering functions........................................................................................95
Enter a function:...........................................................................................95
Importing text...............................................................................96
Import with the Import command:..................................................................96
Selecting text.................................................................................96
Selecting text passages.................................................................................96
Single text passages.....................................................................................97
Mark a text passage with the mouse:...............................................................97
Mark a text passage with keyboard commands:................................................97
Mark a text passage with keystrokes:...............................................................97
Marking across pages: ..................................................................................97
Selecting text elements..................................................................................97
Select a word interactively with the mouse:......................................................97
Select a line interactively with the mouse: .......................................................98
VI Select a sentence interactively with the mouse: ................................................98
Contents

Select a paragraph interactively with the mouse: ..............................................98


Choose a word using the keyboard: ................................................................98
Choose text passage with the keyboard:...........................................................98
Select the whole text.....................................................................................99
Select the whole text with the mouse:..............................................................99
Change current text selection.........................................................................99
Change text selection:...................................................................................99
Deselect a text selection................................................................................99
Editing text...................................................................................100
Delete and replace text.................................................................................100
Delete previous character: ............................................................................100
Delete next character:..................................................................................100
Delete text passages:...................................................................................100
Deleting and replacing text selections:...........................................................100
Cut text......................................................................................................100
Cut text: ....................................................................................................100
Copy text....................................................................................................101
Copy text:...................................................................................................101
Paste text....................................................................................................101
Paste text:...................................................................................................101
Exporting text...............................................................................102
Export Text:................................................................................................102
Managing attributes......................................................................102
Tabs............................................................................................102
Search and Replace........................................................................103
Search and Replace a character string:............................................................103
Search and Replace invisibles:.......................................................................103
Search and Replace attributes:......................................................................104
Index and Tables...........................................................................104
Create an index entry for a text string:............................................................104
Generate an index:......................................................................................104
Language, Spelling and Hyphenation...............................................105
Language...................................................................................................105
Assign a language to a text passage:..............................................................105
Assign a new language to be applied to all new text objects:.............................106
Hyphenation...............................................................................................106
Define Hyphenation Module..........................................................................107
Choose Hyphenation module:........................................................................107
Automatic Hyphenation Options....................................................................107
Activate Automatic Hyphenation:...................................................................107
Deactivate Automatic Hyphenation: ...............................................................108
Check Automatic Hyphenation.......................................................................108
Show Hyphenation Suggestions: ...................................................................109
Manage Hyphenation exceptions...................................................................109
Define hyphenation exceptions: ....................................................................109
Define a No Hyphenation: ............................................................................109
Define hyphenation quality: ..........................................................................110
Spell Check..................................................................................................110
Define Spell Check Module:............................................................................110
Manual Spell Check.......................................................................................110
Start manual Spell Check:..............................................................................110
VII Manual Grammar Check.................................................................................111
Contents

Start Grammar Check:....................................................................................111


Automatic Spell and Grammar Check................................................................111
Switch Automatic Spell and Grammar Check on and off:......................................111
Correcting errors displayed by automatic Spell and Grammar Check:...................112
Character Map Palette.....................................................................113
Search for and insert characters........................................................113
Insert single characters of a font into the text...................................................113
Insert single characters from another font variation...........................................114
Adapt the Character Map Palette.....................................................................114
Search for characters in the Character Map Palette.............................................114
Managing Favorites........................................................................115
Open Favorites list........................................................................................115
Save single characters of a font as Favorites......................................................115
Remove characters from the Favorites list.........................................................115
Bullets & Numbering.......................................................................116
Introduction..................................................................................116
Applying Bullets to a list..................................................................116
Create a simple bulleted list...........................................................................117
Applying Numbering to a list...........................................................117
Create a simple numbered list........................................................................117
Formatting and personalizing lists....................................................117
Personalize bulleted list.................................................................................117
Personalize numbered list..............................................................................118
Set numbers in numbered list to “Right”..........................................................118
Working with lists...........................................................................118
Fix the color of the bullet or number in a list.....................................................119
Lists with two or more levels............................................................120
Create Style Sheets for numbered list..............................................................120
Apply different Style Sheets to List..................................................................120
Tips and Tricks for Bullets and Numbering Lists...................................121
Footnotes and Endnotes..................................................................122
Preparations for Footnotes and Endnotes...........................................123
Preferences for Footnotes and Endnotes...........................................................123
Define Preferences for Footnotes and Endnotes:................................................123
Footnote Position...........................................................................124
Define the Footnote Position:.........................................................................125
Working with Footnotes and Endnotes...............................................125
Inserting Footnotes and Endnotes...................................................................126
Insert Footnotes and Endnotes:......................................................................126
Convert Footnotes and Endnotes....................................................................126
Convert Footnotes and Endnotes:...................................................................126
Automatic Numbering..................................................................................126
Switch off Automatic Numbering:...................................................................127
Switch on Automatic Numbering:...................................................................127
Deleting Footnotes and Endnotes....................................................................127
Delete Footnotes and Endnotes:......................................................................127
VIII General Tips for Footnotes and Endnotes............................................127
Contents

7 Working with Pictures


Raster or Vector Images .................................................................130
Commonly used image formats ........................................................131
Raster Image Formats ...................................................................................131
The TIFF Format ............................................................................................131
The JPEG format ..........................................................................................132
The BMP format ...........................................................................................132
The PNG format ...........................................................................................133
The SCITEX formats ......................................................................................133
Vector Image Formats ....................................................................133
The EPS Format ............................................................................................133
The EPS/DCS Format .....................................................................................134
The PDF Format ...........................................................................................134
OPI Images .................................................................................................134
EPSF Vector Images and Fonts ..........................................................135
Vector Images and Colors ...............................................................135
Creating Picture Objects .................................................................135
Create a new picture object interactively: .......................................................136
Create a new picture object with menu/shortcut keys: ......................................136
Convert an existing object into a picture object: ..............................................136
Summary Creating Picture Objects ...................................................136
Image Mode .................................................................................137
Activate/Leave Image Mode ..........................................................................137
Activate Picture mode: .................................................................................137
Ways of leaving Picture Mode: ......................................................................137
Importing Pictures ........................................................................138
The Import Command ..................................................................................138
Import picture with the dialog: .....................................................................138
Drag and Drop ............................................................................................139
Import pictures to existing picture objects with Drag and Drop: .........................139
Import several pictures with Drag and Drop: ...................................................139
Clipboard ..................................................................................................139
Deleting, Cutting and Copying Image Content ...................................139
Deleting/Cutting/Replacing picture content: ..................................................140
Copy & Paste picture content: .......................................................................140
Defining the Crop ..........................................................................140
Moving Picture Content ................................................................................141
Move picture content interactively: ................................................................141
Display options for moving pictures: ..............................................................141
Move picture preview using menu: ................................................................142
Move picture preview precisely with the dialog: ..............................................143
Resizing Picture Object ................................................................................143
Resizing a picture object: .............................................................................143
Fitting the picture object to the picture preview: .............................................144
Summary Moving Picture Content ....................................................144
Mirror, Rotate and Skew .................................................................144
Mirroring, rotating or skewing picture previews with the Module palette: ............144
IX
Contents

Mirroring, rotating or skewing picture previews with the dialog: ........................145


Scaling Image Preview....................................................................145
Scaling image preview proportionally: ...........................................................146
Scaling image preview unproportionally: .......................................................147
Scaling image preview unproportionally with the dialog: .................................147
Tips and Tricks with Images ............................................................148
Image import .............................................................................................148
Image display.............................................................................................148
8 Working with Pages
Working with document pages ........................................................150
Create a new document page ........................................................................150
Create new document pages using the dialog: ................................................150
Create new (blank) document page(s) interactively: ........................................150
Create new (default) document page(s) interactively: .......................................151
Selecting document pages ............................................................................151
Select a document page: ..............................................................................151
Page views .................................................................................................151
Document Composition: ...............................................................................152
Page Preview in the Page palette....................................................................152
Activate/Deactivate Page View:......................................................................152
Deleting document pages .............................................................................152
Deleting document pages with the dialog: ......................................................153
Deleting document pages interactively: .........................................................153
Move document pages .................................................................................153
Move document pages interactively: .............................................................154
Working with Alias pages ...............................................................154
Switch between Alias and document pages .....................................................155
Switch to an Alias page: ...............................................................................155
Switch to document pages: ..........................................................................155
Create new Alias page ..................................................................................156
Create new Alias page: .................................................................................156
Switch between Alias pages ..........................................................................156
Switch between Alias pages: .........................................................................157
Assign an Alias page to a document page .......................................................157
Assign an Alias page to a document page with the dialog: ................................157
Assign an Alias page to a document page interactively: ....................................157
Assign one Alias page to several document pages at once: ................................158
Deleting the assignment of Alias pages ..........................................................158
Create new document pages with Alias page ...................................................158
Create new document pages with Alias page using Dialog: ................................158
Create new document pages with Alias page interactively: ................................159
Deleting Alias pages ....................................................................................159
Delete Alias page: .......................................................................................159
Change Alias page name ..............................................................................160
Change Alias page name: .............................................................................160
Duplicate Alias Pages...................................................................................160
Duplicate Alias Page:....................................................................................160
Protect Alias Pages.......................................................................................160
Protect Alias Page:........................................................................................161
Unlock Alias Page:........................................................................................161

X
Contents

Working with page numbers ...........................................................161


Define page numbering ...............................................................................162
Change page numbering: ............................................................................162
Using variables for page numbers .................................................................162
Inserting variables for page numbers in text: ..................................................163
Logical and physical page numbers ...............................................................163
Define the page number display in the Preferences: .........................................164
9 Working with Style Sheets
Introduction.................................................................................166
Create/Import Text Style Sheets........................................................166
Create Text Style Sheets................................................................................166
Create a simple Text Style Sheet:....................................................................166
Create a text Style Sheet with a template: .......................................................167
Importing Text Style Sheets...........................................................................168
Assigning Text Style Sheets.............................................................168
Assigning Text Style Sheets manually.............................................................168
Assigning Text Style Sheets manually: ............................................................168
Assigning Text Style sheets automatically........................................................169
Assign Text Style Sheets automatically:...........................................................169
Replace Text Style Sheets automatically:.........................................................169
Assign Text Style Sheets automatically using the Preferences:.............................170
Changing the assignment of Text Style Sheets..................................................170
Cancel or change a Text Style Sheet assignment manually:.................................170
Cancel or change a Text Style Sheet assignment automatically:...........................171
Editing Style Sheets.........................................................................171
Renaming Style Sheets..................................................................................171
Rename Style Sheets:....................................................................................171
Duplicate Style Sheets:..................................................................................172
Delete one or more Style Sheets:.....................................................................172
10 Working with Tables
Create Tables................................................................................174
Create a table object:...................................................................................174
Selecting table rows, columns and cells.............................................175
Activate Table mode:....................................................................................175
Leave Table mode:.......................................................................................175
Select a table cell:........................................................................................175
Select several table cells:..............................................................................176
Select one or more table rows:.......................................................................176
Select one or more table columns:..................................................................176
Editing table rows and columns.......................................................176
Defining row height and column width...........................................................177
Define row height or column width interactively:..............................................177
Define row height or column width numerically:...............................................177
Hiding rows and columns.............................................................................178
Inserting/Adding rows and columns...............................................................178
Insert a row or column:.................................................................................178
Add one or more rows and/or columns:..........................................................178
Delete/Remove a column or row:....................................................................178
XI Delete/Remove one or more rows and/or columns:............................................178
Contents

Editing table cells..........................................................................179


Extend cells................................................................................................179
Extend cells:...............................................................................................179
Merge cells.................................................................................................179
Merge cells:................................................................................................179
Split merged cells:.......................................................................................179
Cell Indents................................................................................................180
Define cell indents:......................................................................................180
Cell content................................................................................................180
Define cell content:......................................................................................180
Cell alignment............................................................................................180
Define cell alignment:...................................................................................181
Define cell rotation:......................................................................................181
Enter/import text in tables...............................................................181
Navigation in Tables:...................................................................................182
Import text into tables..................................................................................182
Import text into a cell:..................................................................................182
Import tab stop separated text:.....................................................................182
Graphic attributes for Tables...........................................................183
Colors for cells, rows and columns..................................................................184
Spacers......................................................................................................184
Create table with standard grid:....................................................................184
Edit the grid:..............................................................................................184
Switch grid off:...........................................................................................185
Define Spacers for individual cells, columns or rows:.........................................185
11 Exchange with InDesign
Introduction.................................................................................187
General tips for import...................................................................187
Documents and pages..................................................................................187
Objects......................................................................................................188
Text and typography.....................................................................188
Character and paragraph attributes...............................................................188
Text overflow..............................................................................................189
Breaks........................................................................................................189
Line spacing...............................................................................................189
Anchored (floating) objects..........................................................................189
Hyphenation...............................................................................................190
Images.........................................................................................190
Preview......................................................................................................190
Formats......................................................................................................190
Tables...........................................................................................191
Colors...........................................................................................191
Style sheets...................................................................................192
Importing an IDML file....................................................................192
Import IDML file...........................................................................................192

XII
Contents

General Tips for Export (w.e.f. Version 8)..........................................194


Exporting an IDML file....................................................................195
Export IDML file...........................................................................................195
12 Package & Send
Create a package...........................................................................197
Send a package...........................................................................................198
Sending data directly to the Recipient..............................................199
Install Communication Profile........................................................................199
Installation of a Configuration Profile:............................................................200
Technical Information for Administrators..........................................200
Introduction...............................................................................................201
The Communication Profile............................................................................201
The Communication Protocol.........................................................................201
Step 1: Settings request.................................................................................201
Define Proxy Settings for VivaDesigner/VIVA File Sender:..................................202
Step 2: Data transfer....................................................................................202

XIII
General Information
General Information

General Information
About this manual
VIVA Software programs are constructed in such a way that the functions are
almost self-explanatory. Thus you do not have to read this manual completely
to be able to work with the program. We have tried to build this manual
didactically, but in the first instance it serves as a work of reference. You can
go through each chapter separately. If individual descriptions refer to func-
tions described in other chapters, an appropriate reference is made.

This manual was created with VivaDesigner for Windows. Despite all our
efforts, some errors may be contained in the manual. We would therefore be
pleased to receive all your comments and criticisms that will help us to
improve the quality of our products.

Delivery & Updates


The manual is supplied in electronic form and is not part of the installation program of every
VIVA application. In such cases the VIVA application enables a command to open the manual
which is stored in the Internet. Thus the manual may be updated by VIVA at any time. to read
the manual, you need the Adobe Reader that is available free of charge on the Internet.

Prior knowledge
To understand the instructions in this manual, you should have the following knowledge:
- The use of shortcut key commands and the mouse.
- The installation and starting of a computer program.
- Working with files and folders, especially opening, saving and closing files.
- Switching between program and operating system.
- Using and controlling printers.

2
General Information

Conventions
In the manual, a series of expressions and conventions helps for better comprehension.
- Operating systems: The manual was written for a computer program that may be used on
several operating systems. The manual therefore only refers to a specific operating system
when the program behaves differently under different operating systems, or if another
operation is necessary. The operating systems are abbreviated in the manual as Windows
(for Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, etc.), Linux (for all Linux Variations) and
Mac (for Mac OS X).
- Mouse buttons: The majority of computer mouse units have several buttons. In the manual
we have dispensed with the expressions »right mouse button« or »left mouse button«, as
the functions for these buttons in the operating system are adjustable for left- or right-
handers. For this reason we use the correct expressions primary mouse button, secondary
mouse button and Scroll wheel.
- Menu commands: Menu commands are described as far as possible according to the oper-
ating system. A menu command consists of the commands in the main menu and the
appropriate submenu, which are separated by a »greater than« character (>).
- Keyboards: Not all keyboards use the same names for the same functions. Below are a few
examples of German keys with their equivalents:
- »Strg« = »Ctrl«
- »Entf« = »Del« or »forward delete«
- »Pos 1« = »Home«
- Shortcut key commands: Shortcut key commands are described as far as possible accord-
ing to the operating system. A key command consists of one or more key combinations. In
such a combination the keys must be pressed in the order given. The keys are separated by
a plus sign (+). The shortcut key command Ctrl+Shift+B means that you must first press
down the Ctrl key, then Shift and finally the B key together.
- Style: Characters displayed in the font »Courier« display the entry that is required from the
user.

3
General Information

Services
Program Help
If you need help for the VIVA application, the following resources are available:
1. The program’s own user manual:
- Select the menu command Help > Start Dialog.
- -Click the command for the program manual.
2. The application website:
- Select the menu command Help.
- Select the command for the program website.
3. Send a message to VIVA:
- Select the menu command Help > Send a message to VIVA.
- Fill out the fields in the Internet browser and describe your problem in as much detail as
possible.
If you have problems with your operating system, please read the documentation supplied with
your computer. This particularly refers to problems with:
- access to discs and folders,
- saving files,
- usage of fonts or single characters in a font, and
- usage of printers and output devices.
Note:
The usage of additional applications which add to or extend the functions of the operating
system may limit the functionality of the program or its usage completely. These may include:
- Programs that change the display of windows, documents and dialogs
- Programs that change the access to and management of fonts.
Therefore we cannot give any guarantees for program usage in conjunction with these programs.

Additional Services
VIVA offers many additional services on request. These include:
1. Service & Support:
- -Training & Workshops
- -Telephone Hotline in several languages
- -Service & Support contracts
- -Support for your developers (Support/example code)

4
General Information

2. Support and advice for publishing projects in


- -Planning
- -Development
- -Automation
- -Implementation
3. Software development
- -Extension of existing VIVA applications
- -Programming individual applications
4. Provision
- -Hosting VIVA products
- -Renting VIVA products

Legal notices
VIVA Trademarks
Viva®, VIVA®, VivaDesigner®, VivaImpose®, VivaPosterize®, VivaXML®, VIVA Network Pub-
lishing®, Database Publsihing®, VivaIP®, VivaCP® and VivaPress® are registered trademarks of
VIVA GmbH. Companies and product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or regis-
tered trademarks of the respective companies.
All rights reserved. © 1994, 2014 VIVA GmbH. All unauthorised copying of this manual or the
software will be subject to legal prosecution. Rights to the software programs are owned by
Viva GmbH, Koblenz, Germany. Rights to the documentation and rights to the object-oriented
Alias concept are owned by Andreas Krings. Legal purchase of the program version and manual
entitles the user to use the product according to the conditions of the licensing agreement.
Duplication, sale or other use of the product not complying with the conditions of the licensing
agreement is prohibited. Copies of the programs may be made only for data backup purposes.

Trademarks of other manufacturers


Microsoft, OpenType, Excel, Internet Explorer and Windows are registered trademarks of the
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Mac, Mac OS, TrueType, Safari, Apple, AppleScript and Macintosh are registered trademarks of
Apple, Inc. in the United States and other countries. QuickTime is a licensed trademark. Quick-
Time is registered in the U.S.A. and other countries.
Adobe, PostScript, Photoshop, Acrobat, Reader, the Adobe Logo, Flash and Macromedia are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/
or other countries.

5
General Information

Quark, the Quark Logo, QuarkXPress, XTensions, QuarkXTensions, Job Jackets, Composition
Zones and other trademarks used occasionally in connection with Quarkare trademarks of
Quark Inc. and all connected and subsidiary companies.
The PANTONE® colors displayed in the software or in the user documentation may possibly not
be identical with the PANTONE color standards. Please check the exact colors in the current
PANTONE publications. PANTONE and other trademarks of Pantone, Inc. are the property of
Pantone, Inc. ©Pantone, Inc., 2007.
Color Data is manufactured under licence from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc.
FOCOLTONE and FOCOLTONE Colour System are registered trademarks of FOCOLTONE. Concept,
structure and form of the FOCOLTONE material and its intellectual property are protected by
Patent and copyright. Reproduction in any form, in whole or in part, for private use or for sale,
is strictly prohibited. Further information on the patents is available from FOCOLTONE, Ltd.
Toyo Ink Mfg. Co., Ltd. is the owner of the copyrights of the TOYO INK COLOR FINDER™ SYSTEM
AND SOFTWARE. ©TOYO INK MFG. CO., LTD., 1991. COLOR FINDER has been registered as a trade-
mark by the Toyo Ink Mfg. Co., Ltd.
TRUMATCH, TRUMATCH Swatching System and TRUMATCH System are trademarks of TRUMATCH,
Inc.
Netscape Navigator is a registered trademark of Netscape in the United States and in other
countries.
WordPerfect is a registered trademark of the Corel Corporation.
Unicode is a trademark of Unicode, Inc.
Firefox is a trademark of the Mozilla Foundation.

6
General Information VIVA Softwarelizenzvertrag

VIVA Software License Agreement


PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“LICENSE”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE VIVA
SOFTWARE. BY USING THE VIVA SOFTWARE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS
LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE, DO NOT USE THE SOFTWARE. IF YOU
DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THE LICENSE, YOU MAY RETURN THE VIVA SOFTWARE TO THE PLACE
WHERE YOU OBTAINED IT FOR A REFUND. IF THE VIVA SOFTWARE WAS ACCESSED ELECTRONICALLY,
CLICK “DISAGREE/DECLINE”. FOR VIVA SOFTWARE INCLUDED WITH YOUR PURCHASE OF HARDWARE,
YOU MUST RETURN THE ENTIRE HARDWARE/SOFTWARE PACKAGE IN ORDER TO OBTAIN A REFUND.
IN THE EVENT THAT A SYSTEM INTEGRATOR, CONSULTANT, CONTRACTOR OR OTHER PARTY BREAKS
THE SEAL FOR LICENSEE, OR USES OR INSTALLS THE SOFTWARE ON LICENSEE’S BEHALF PRIOR TO
LICENSEE’S USE OF THE SOFTWARE, SUCH SYSTEM INTEGRATOR, CONSULTANT, CONTRACTOR OR
OTHER PARTY WILL BE DEEMED TO BE LICENSEE’S AGENT ACTING ON LICENSEE’S BEHALF AND LICEN-
SEE WILL BE DEEMED TO HAVE ACCEPTED ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT AS
IF LICENSEE HAD BROKEN THE SEAL OR USED OR INSTALLED THE SOFTWARE.
NOTICE TO SYSTEM INTEGRATORS, CONSULTANTS, CONTRACTORS AND OTHER PARTIES WHO DO NOT
INTEND TO BE END USERS OF THE SOFTWARE: IF YOU BREAK THE SEAL, OR USE OR INSTALL THE SOFT-
WARE AS AN AGENT ACTING ON BEHALF OF THE LICENSEE, THEN, UNLESS YOU HAVE ENTERED INTO A
SEPARATE AGREEMENT WITH VIVA, (I) YOU AGREE TO DELIVER THE TANGIBLE MEDIA CONTAINING
THE SOFTWARE AND THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT TO THE LICENSEE PRIOR TO PROVIDING THE LICENSEE
ACCESS TO THE SOFTWARE, AND (II) YOU AGREE THAT YOU WILL NOT RETAIN ANY COPIES OF THE
SOFTWARE. OTHERWISE, YOU WILL BE DEEMED TO BE THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE AND BOUND BY
THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT.
IMPORTANT NOTE: This software may be used to reproduce materials. It is licensed to you only
for reproduction of non-copyrighted materials, materials in which you own the copyright, or
materials you are authorized or legally permitted to reproduce. If you are uncertain about your
right to copy any material, you should contact your legal advisor.
1. General. The software (including all content), documentation and any fonts accompanying
the software (if any), whether on disk, in read only memory, on any other media or in any
other form (collectively the VIVA Software) is licensed, not sold, to you by VIVA GmbH
(VIVA) for use only under the terms of this License, and VIVA reserves all rights not expressly
granted to you herein. The rights granted herein are limited to VIVA’s and its licensors’
intellectual property rights in the VIVA Software and do not include any other patents or
intellectual property rights. You own the media on which the VIVA Software is recorded but
VIVA and/or VIVA’s licensor(s) retain ownership of the VIVA Software itself. The terms of this
License will govern any software upgrades provided by VIVA that replace and/or supple-
ment the original VIVA Software, unless such upgrade is accompanied by a separate license
in which case the terms of that license will govern.
Title and intellectual property rights in and to any content displayed by or accessed through
the VIVA Software belongs to the respective content owner. Such content may be protected by
copyright or other intellectual property laws and treaties, and may be subject to terms of use
of the third party providing such content. This License does not grant you any rights to use
such content. You may not access the Digital Imagery contained within the VIVA Software as
stand alone files or use the Digital Imagery outside the context of the intended use of the VIVA
Software.
7
General Information VIVA Softwarelizenzvertrag

2. Permitted License Uses and Restrictions.


A.VIVA Single User License. This License allows you to install and use one copy of the VIVA
Software (chargeable full licensed version) on ONE computer at a time. This License does
not allow the VIVA Software to exist on more than one computer at a time, and you may
not make the VIVA Software available over a network where it could be used by multiple
computers at the same time. You may make one copy of the VIVA Software in machine-
readable form for backup purposes only; provided that the backup copy must include
all copyright or other proprietary notices contained on the original.
B.VIVA Multi-User License. With a “VIVA Multi-User License”, VIVA and/or VIVA’s licen-
sor(s) give you permission for the installation and usage of a copy of the VIVA Software
(chargeable full licensed version) on SEVERAL computers. Within the scope of this license
contract, the existence of the VIVA Software on more than one computer at a time is per-
mitted within the definitions permitted by VIVA. With a classroom license for 15 users,
you can for example install and use the software simultaneously on 15 computers. Apart
from this, you may not make the VIVA Software available over a network where it could
be used by multiple computers at the same time. You may make one copy of the VIVA
Software in machine-readable form for backup purposes only; provided that the backup
copy must include all copyright or other proprietary notices contained on the original.
C.VIVA Internal Server License for end users. Within the scope of a “VIVA Internal Server
License for end users”, VIVA and/or VIVA’s licensor(s) give you permission for the instal-
lation and usage of a copy of the VIVA Software (chargeable full licensed version) on
ONE computer. Within the scope of this license contract, the existence of the VIVA Soft-
ware on more than one computer at a time is not permitted. It is permitted to provide
the VIVA software via an INTERNAL network where it can be used by more than one com-
puter at the same time. “Internal network for end users” means your private, company-
owned network resource, that is only accessible to authorized employees and/or autho-
rized employees of subsidiaries of your organization. Suppliers and/or customers are
explicitly excluded from usingf the software. Access via an encrypted connection such as
VPN or a dial-in to an internal network with which authorized users are enable access to
the software counts as usage on an internal network. You may make one copy of the
VIVA Software in machine-readable form for backup purposes only; provided that the
backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary notices contained on the
original.
D.VIVA Internal Server License for service providers. Within the scope of a “VIVA Internal
Server License for service providers”, VIVA and/or VIVA’s licensor(s) give you permission
for the installation and usage of a copy of the VIVA Software (chargeable full licensed
version) on ONE computer. Within the scope of this license contract, the existence of the
VIVA Software on more than one computer at a time is not permitted. It is permitted to
provide the VIVA software via an INTERNAL network where it can be used by more than
one computer at the same time. “Internal network for service providers” means your pri-
vate, company-owned network resource, that is only accessible to authorized employees
and/or authorized employees of subsidiaries of your organization. Suppliers and/or cus-
tomers are explicitly excluded from usingf the software. Access via an encrypted con-
nection such as VPN or a dial-in to an internal network with which authorized users are
enable access to the software counts as usage on an internal network. You may make one
copy of the VIVA Software in machine-readable form for backup purposes only; pro-
8
General Information VIVA Softwarelizenzvertrag

vided that the backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary notices con-
tained on the original.
E. VIVA Public Server License for end users. Within the scope of a “VIVA Public Server
License for end users”, VIVA and/or VIVA’s licensor(s) give you permission for the instal-
lation and usage of a copy of the VIVA Software (chargeable full licensed version) on
ONE computer. Within the scope of this license contract, the existence of the VIVA Soft-
ware on more than one computer at a time is not permitted. It is permitted to provide
the VIVA software via a PUBLIC network where it can be used by more than one computer
at the same time. “Public network for end users” means your network resource, that is
accessible to everyone. Provision of the software as a general service provider (e.g.
Application Service Provider) is explicitly excluded. You may make one copy of the VIVA
Software in machine-readable form for backup purposes only; provided that the backup
copy must include all copyright or other proprietary notices contained on the original.
F. VIVA Public Server License for service providers. Within the scope of a “VIVA Public
Server License for service providers”, VIVA and/or VIVA’s licensor(s) give you permission
for the installation and usage of a copy of the VIVA Software (chargeable full licensed
version) on ONE computer. Within the scope of this license contract, the existence of the
VIVA Software on more than one computer at a time is not permitted. It is permitted to
provide the VIVA software via a PUBLIC network where it can be used by more than one
computer at the same time. “Public network for end users” means your network
resource, that is accessible to everyone. Provision of the software as a general service
provider (e.g. Application Service Provider) is explicitly permitted. You may make one
copy of the VIVA Software in machine-readable form for backup purposes only; pro-
vided that the backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary notices con-
tained on the original.
G. Except as and only to the extent permitted in this License, by applicable licensing
terms governing use of the Open-Sourced Components, and by applicable law, you
may not copy, decompile, reverse engineer, disassemble, modify, or create derivative
works of the VIVA Software or any part thereof. This omission relates to both the pro-
gram code, as well as passwords, program structures and concepts, regardless of
whether they are marked with a copyright notice or are included in source code, inso-
far as this is not permitted within the scope of this license agreement or through
licensing regulations regarding the use of open source components or through legal
restrictions. THE VIVA SOFTWARE IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE IN THE OPERATION OF
NUCLEAR FACILITIES, AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS, AIR TRAFFIC
CONTROL SYSTEMS, LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES OR OTHER EQUIPMENT IN WHICH THE FAIL-
URE OF THE VIVA SOFTWARE COULD LEAD TO DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY, OR SEVERE PHYSI-
CAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE.
3. Compliance with Licenses. To ensure compliance with the terms of this Agreement, VIVA
may, no more than once annually, appoint an independent third party to audit and inspect
all the Computers and networks on which you (or your contracting parties) install and/or
access the software. Any such audit shall be conducted at its expense during regular busi-
ness hours at your offices and shall not unreasonably interfere with your business activities.
You agree to give VIVA or the independent third party under this License Agreement the
right of access to all computers and networks. If you deny access or hinder the testing and
inspection, VIVA may terminate the right of use without further testing and without refund-
9 ing the fees paid to date. If such audit shows that you are not using the Software in accor-
General Information VIVA Softwarelizenzvertrag

dance with the terms of this Agreement, you shall pay the applicable fees for such addi-
tional copies within thirty (30) days of invoice, with such underpaid fees being the license
fees as per VIVA’s then-current, country specific, price list. If underpaid fees are in excess of
five percent (5%) of the value of the fees paid under this Agreement, then you shall pay such
underpaid fees and VIVA’s reasonable costs of conducting the audit. Nothing in this Section
shall be deemed to limit any legal or equitable remedies available to VIVA for violation of
this Agreement.
4. Transfer. You may not rent, lease, lend, redistribute or sublicense the VIVA Software. You
may, however, make a one-time permanent transfer of all of your license rights to the VIVA
Software (in its original form as provided by VIVA) to another party, provided that: (a) the
transfer must include all of the VIVA Software, including all its component parts, original
media, printed materials and this License; (b) you do not retain any copies of the VIVA Soft-
ware, full or partial, including copies stored on a computer or other storage device; and (c)
the party receiving the VIVA Software reads and agrees to accept the terms and conditions
of this License. You may not rent, lease, lend, redistribute, sublicense or transfer any VIVA
Software that has been modified or replaced under Section 2D above. All components of the
VIVA Software are provided as part of a bundle and may not be separated from the bundle
and distributed as standalone applications.
A.Updates: If an VIVA Software update completely replaces a previously licensed version
(full installation) of the VIVA Software, you may not use both versions of the VIVA Soft-
ware at the same time nor may you transfer them separately.
B.NFR (Not for Resale) Copies: Notwithstanding other sections of this License, VIVA Soft-
ware labeled or otherwise provided to you on a promotional basis may only be used for
demonstration, testing and evaluation purposes and may not be resold or transferred.
C.EDU Copies: If the VIVA Software package has an EDU label or if you acquired the VIVA
Software at a discount price for academic/educational institutions, you must be an eli-
gible educational end user to use the VIVA Software. “Eligible educational end users”
means students, faculty, staff and administration attending and/or working at an edu-
cational institutional facility (i.e., college campus, public or private K-12 schools, uni-
versities, etc.).
5. Consent to Use of Data. You agree that VIVA and its subsidiaries may collect and use techni-
cal and related information, including but not limited to technical information about your
computer, system and application software, and peripherals, that is gathered periodically
to facilitate the provision of software updates, product support and other services to you (if
any) related to the VIVA Software. VIVA may use this information, as long as it is in a form
that does not personally identify you, to improve our products or to provide services or
technologies to you.
6. Termination. This License is effective until terminated. Your rights under this License will ter-
minate automatically without notice from VIVA if you fail to comply with any term(s) of this
License. Upon the termination of this License, you shall cease all use of the VIVA Software
and destroy all copies, full or partial, of the VIVA Software.
7. Limited Warranty on Media. VIVA warrants the media on which the VIVA Software is
recorded and delivered by VIVA to be free from defects in materials and workmanship
under normal use for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of original retail purchase.
10 Your exclusive remedy under this Section shall be, at VIVA’s option, a refund of the pur-
General Information VIVA Softwarelizenzvertrag

chase price of the product containing the VIVA Software or replacement of the VIVA Soft-
ware which is returned to VIVA or an VIVA authorized representative together with proof of
purchase. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE MEDIA INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY QUAL-
ITY, AND OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO NINETY (90)
DAYS FROM THE DATE OF ORIGINAL RETAIL PURCHASE. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIM-
ITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU. THE LIMITED WARRANTY SET FORTH HEREIN IS THE ONLY WARRANTY MADE TO
YOU AND IS PROVIDED IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES (IF ANY) CREATED BY ANY DOCU-
MENTATION, PACKAGING OR OTHERWISE. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL
RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY BY JURISDICTION.
8. Disclaimer of Warranties. YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF THE VIVA
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU. EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY ON
MEDIA SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE
VIVA SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, AND VIVA AND VIVA’S LICENSORS (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO AS “VIVA” FOR THE PUR-
POSES OF SECTIONS 7 AND 8) HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH
RESPECT TO THE VIVA SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF SAT-
ISFACTORY QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET ENJOY-
MENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. VIVA DOES NOT WARRANT AGAINST
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE VIVA SOFTWARE, THAT THE FUNCTIONS CON-
TAINED IN THE VIVA SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
VIVA SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE VIVA SOFT-
WARE WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY VIVA OR
AN VIVA AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE VIVA SOFT-
WARE PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR
OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION
AND LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
9. Limitation of Liability. TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL VIVA BE
LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS,
LOSS OF DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES,
ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO YOUR USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE VIVA SOFTWARE, HOWEVER
CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN
IF VIVA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUEN-
TIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. In no event shall VIVA’s total
liability to you for all damages (other than as may be required by applicable law in cases
involving personal injury) exceed the amount of fifty dollars ($50.00). The foregoing limita-
tions will apply even if the above stated remedy fails of its essential purpose.
10. Export Control. You may not use or otherwise export or reexport the VIVA Software except as
authorized by United States law and the laws of the jurisdiction in which the VIVA Software
was obtained. In particular, but without limitation, the VIVA Software may not be exported
11 or re-exported (a) into any U.S. embargoed countries or (b) to anyone on the U.S. Treasury
General Information VIVA Softwarelizenzvertrag

Department’s list of Specially Designated Nationals or the U.S. Department of Commerce


Denied Person’s List or Entity List. By using the VIVA Software, you represent and warrant
that you are not located in any such country or on any such list. You also agree that you will
not use these products for any purposes prohibited by United States law, including, without
limitation, the development, design, manufacture or production of nuclear, missiles, or
chemical or biological weapons.
11. Government End Users. The VIVA Software and related documentation are “Commercial
Items”, as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. §2.101, consisting of “Commercial Computer Soft-
ware” and “Commercial Computer Software Documentation”, as such terms are used in 48
C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48
C.F.R. §227.7202–1 through 227.7202–4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software
and Commercial Computer Software Documentation are being licensed to U.S. Government
end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all
other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. Unpublished-rights reserved
under the copyright laws of the United States.
12. Controlling Law and Severability. This License will be governed by and construed in accor-
dance with the laws of the Federal Republic of Germany. This License shall not be governed
by the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the
application of which is expressly excluded. If for any reason a court of competent jurisdic-
tion finds any provision, or portion thereof, to be unenforceable, the remainder of this
License shall continue in full force and effect.
13. Complete Agreement; Governing Language. This License constitutes the entire agreement
between the parties with respect to the use of the VIVA Software licensed hereunder and
supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings regarding such subject matter. No
amendment to or modification of this License will be binding unless in writing and signed
by VIVA. Any translation of this License is done for local requirements and in the event of a
dispute between the English and any non-English versions, the English version of this
License shall govern.
14. Third Party Acknowledgements.
A.Portions of the VIVA Software utilize or include third party software and other copy-
righted material. Acknowledgements, licensing terms and disclaimers for such material
are contained in the “online” electronic documentation for the VIVA Software, or may
otherwise accompany such material, and your use of such material is governed by their
respective terms.
B.Certain software libraries and other third party software included with the VIVA Software
are free software and licensed under the terms of the GNU General Public License (GPL) or
the GNU Library/Lesser General Public License (LGPL), as the case may be. You may
obtain a complete machine-readable copy of the source code for such free software
under the terms of the GPL or LGPL, as the case may be, without charge except for the
cost of media, shipping, and handling, upon written request to VIVA. The GPL/LGPL soft-
ware is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, with-
out even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-
POSE. A copy of the GPL and LGPL is included with the VIVA Software.

12
Installation
Installation

Installation
Preparing the Installation
For the installation and subsequent problem-free operation of the layout program VivaDesigner,
the following conditions are absolutely essential. These are explained below.
Step 1: The correct installation program for your operating system
For the software installation VIVA has developed appropriate installation programs for different
operating systems (Windows, Mac OS X and Linux). Please ensure when ordering or down-
loading the installer program that you select the correct one for your operating system.
Note:
All VIVA-Programs are available as 32-bit versions. An installation on computers with a 64-
bit operating system is possible in some cases, but the VIVA programs will be supplied in 32-bit
mode, insofar as this is supported by the operating system.
Step 2: Unpacking the installation program
The installation program may be packed in an archive (e.g. ZIP or rar file). A ZIP/RAR file may
be recognized by its suffix, when these are displayed as default. In this case you must unpack
the installation program so as to be able to start it. Programs for unpacking archives (e.g. ZIP
files) are a part of the operating system.
Note:
When using Windows, it may be that the operating system's own unpacking program displays
an empty archive. In this case please use a free of charge additional program (e.g. 7-Zip), to
unpack the ZIP.
Step 3: Installation rights
The installation may under certain circumstances only be possible with local administrator rights.
If you do not possess appropriate rights, please contact your administrator.
Step 4: Licensing the software (chargeable versions only)
1. Free Edition
Users of a free of charge version (Free Edition) do not need a license file. A suitable license file
is included in the installation package.
Note:
A free of charge Free Edition cannot be updated with a license file for chargeable program
versions. In this case you must use another installation program.
2. Demo Version
Users of a free of charge time-limited demo version also do not need a license file. A demo license
file is included in the installation package. When the time limit for using the demo version has
expired, documents may be edited further with the free of charge Free Edition or a chargeable
licensed program version.
3. Personal Edition/Commercial Edition
Users of a chargeable licensed program version will receive an installation program containing
a time limited license file. Replace this license file with the final license file that you will have
received from either VIVA or your product dealer after purchasing the software. The license file
can be used for licensing a program on all platforms and has the suffix .vlk.
14
Installation

To exchange a time-limited license file for a final license file for chargeable program versions
(Personal Edition or Commercial Edition), please see the section Update License Key.
Note:
- Do NOT try to open the license file with another program (Text Editor, etc.) or in a browser.
- Store the license file on your computer and note its location so that you have the license
file for a later installation.
Step 5: Hardware protection
Some special Desktop and Server applications are supplied by VIVA with a hardware protection
key (Dongle) as well as the license file. If you have received software with hardware protection
(e.g. with the purchase of server software), attach the hardware key to your computer's USB
connection before you install the software. The VIVA application should recognise the hardware
key automatically after installation, or at least after the computer is rebooted.

Installation on Microsoft Windows


Program installation
Step 1: Unpack the installation program
The installation program may be packed in an archive (e.g. ZIP file). A ZIP file may be recog-
nized by the suffix .zip (see Step 2 Preparing the installation).
Step 2: Start the installation program
Windows XP ONLY:
Click the installation program (Setup.exe) and select the command Run as in the context menu
(right mouse button). Select Following User and enter the Administrator name and password. If
you are sure that you have administrator rights, you can also start the installation program
(Setup.exe) with a double click on the program icon.
Windows Vista, Windows 7 & Windows 8 ONLY:
Click the installation program (Setup.exe) and select the command Run as Administrator in the
context menu (right mouse button). If you are sure that you have administrator rights, you can
also start the installation program (Setup.exe) with a double click on the program icon.
Step 3: Select the installation language
Select a language for the installation program. The language of your operating system will be
selected as standard. If this language is not available for the installer, the program will select
English automatically.
Step 4: Follow the installation instructions
Follow the instructions of the installation program.
Note:
- By default, all the options are defined so that in most cases you only need to confirm the
settings.
- Use the option Standard or Complete.
- In most cases you can go back a step if you think that you may have made a mistake.
- You can cancel the installation at any time and if necessary restart from the beginning.
- Select a valid license file (.vlk). The installation will cancel automatically if you do not
agree to the license conditions.

15
Installation

Step 5: Start the program


After completing and closing the installation, start the program with a double click on the pro-
gram icon. In the standard configuration the program is installed in the folder C:\Programs.
Note:
1. If you have problems installing the program or starting the program after installation,
please check your user rights. It may be that you do not possess the right to install any
software on your computer. In this case please refer to your Administrator.
2. On Windows systems an error warning may appear advising that a DLL/OCX file could not
be registered. In this case, always click the Ignore button.
Step 6: Choose License File
With chargeable licensed versions or after expiry of a time-limited program version, the pro-
gram will ask for a license file at the start. Select the appropriate license file with the suffix .vlk
(see the section Preparing the Installation).
Note:
- For Windows users, it may be that the installation program refuses the license file,
although the installation was carried out as an Administrator. In this case it sometimes
helps to reboot the program several times. Alternatively, you can rename the license file as
viva.vlk and replace the existing file in the Resources sub-folder of your program folder.
- To exchange a time-limited license file for an unlimited license file for chargeable program
versions (Personal Edition or Commercial Edition), please see the section Update License
Key.
- A free of charge Free Edition can NOT be updated with a license file for chargeable pro-
gram versions. In this case you must use another installation program.
Customize your Installation
You can customize the program installation after the event if certain parts of the program should
be stored on other drives or in networks. This can be helpful if, for example. certain elements of
the program (e.g. color lists, license files, etc.) are not stored locally, but are managed centrally.
For this purpose Windows provides the Shortcut concept. You can create shortcuts for individ-
ual files or for complete folders. The shortcuts can link to a local or a network drive.
Uninstalling or deleting the program
On Windows you can un-install with the VIVA program or with the operating system. In both
cases you achieve the same result.
Un-installation with the VIVA program
- Select the Windows Start menu and then the option Remove VivaDesigner.
Un-installation with the operating system
- In the Windows Start menu, select the Control Panel for Software or Programs.
- Select the program to be deleted and follow the instructions.

Installation on Mac OS X
Step 1: Unpack the installation program
Double-click the file icon with the suffix dmg. The operating system will unpack the file and
display it as a disk drive on the Desktop.
16
Installation

Step 2: Copy the program


Double-click the disk drive icon and drag the folder VivaDesigner into the program folder
(Applications), or a folder of your choice (e.g. Desktop).
Step 3: Install the QuickLook module
Drag the file VivaQuickLook.qlgenerator into the folder \Library\QuickLook on your hard
drive or if necessary into your user folder.
Step 4: Start the program
Start the program with a double click on the program icon.
Note:
If you have problems installing the program or starting the program after installation, please
check your user rights. It may be that you do not possess the right to install software on your
computer. In this case please refer to your Administrator.
Step 5: Choose License File
With chargeable licensed versions or after expiry of a time-limited program version, the pro-
gram asks for a license file at the start. Select the appropriate license file with the suffix .vlk
(see the section Preparing the Installation).
Customize Installation
You can customize the program installation after the event if certain parts of the program should
be stored on other drives or in networks. This can be helpful if, for example, some elements of the
program (e.g. color lists, license files, etc.) are not stored locally, but are managed centrally.
For this purpose Mac OS provides the Alias concept. You can create Aliases for individual files
or for complete folders. An Alias can link to a local or a network drive.
Update an installed program version
To update an existing program version on Mac OS X, you should always replace the complete
program folder.
If you are using a licensed version, you may need to select or update your license file. If so,
please refer to the section Update License Key.
Uninstalling or deleting the program
On Mac OS X you can un-install the program by simply deleting the folder VivaDesigner. If you
have already started the program at least once, additional files must be deleted:
Deleting on Mac OSX (10.5)
- Open the folder /Library/Receipts/ on your hard drive.
- Delete all the files starting with Viva and ending with pkg (e.g. VivaDesigner.pkg).
Deleting on Mac OS X (10.6 or newer)
- Start the program Terminal, which is in the Dock or in Utilities.
- Open the folder /private/var/db/receipts (cd /private/var/db/receipts).
- Delete the files viva....bom and viva...plist with the command sudo rm.
(e.g. sudo rm com.viva.designer.bom and sudo rm com.viva.designer.plist)
Your user password will be required to delete these files.

17
Installation

Installation on Linux
Step 1: Choose the installation package
VivaDesigner is available for different distributions, which support different packages. Select
the installation package with the suffix
- .deb (Debian), if for example you use a Debian, Ubuntu or Mint distribution;
- .rpm (Red Hat Package Manager), if you use a RedHat, OpenSuse, Fedora or Mandriva
distribution; or
- .tgz (TAR.GZ), if you use a Slackware, KateOS or NimbleX distribution.
Installations of VivaDesigner 8.0 were tested on the following Linux distributions:
Debian Installation packages
- Debian (Wheezy) 32-bit
- Mint Debian 201303 Cinnamon 32-bit
- Mint 16 (Petra) Cinnamon 32-bit
- Mint 15 (Olivia) Cinnamon 64-bit (please check the notices)
RPM Installation packages
- openSUSE 12.3 (Dartmouth) 32-bit
- openSUSE 13.1 (Bottle) 32-bit
TAR.GZ Installation packages
- Fedora 19 (Schrödinger‹s Cat) 32-bit
If you use the 32-bit program version on a 64-bit operating system, you may need to install the
libraries for 32-bit programs! This is for example the case for the Linux distribution “Mint-15
64-bit”. In this case, please enter “sudo apt-get install ia32-libs” with the Terminal.
If this is not successful, please enter “sudo dpkg --add-architecture i386”, followed by
“sudo apt-get update” and then “sudo apt-get install ia32-libs”.
Step 2: Unpack the installation program
The installation program may be packed in an archive (e.g. ZIP file). A ZIP file may be recog-
nized by the suffix .zip. In this case you must unpack the installation program to be able to
start it. Programs for unpacking archives (e.g. ZIP files) are included as a part of the operating
system.
Step 3: Installation with the Terminal
On Linux systems you can install the software using the Terminal or, with some distributions,
using package/software managers. In both cases you need administrator rights (root user
rights).
If you want to use the operating system package manager to install .deb and .rpm packages,
double click the file icon of the installation package.
If you want to use the Terminal to install the software, please enter:
- dpkg -i program_name.rpm to install a deb package
18
Installation

- rpm -i program_name.rpm to install an rpm package


- tar -xvzf program_name.tgz to install a tgz package. The folder VivaDesigner that is
created can then be copied to anywhere you like.
Note:
Please do not unpack the file on another system (Windows or Mac OS X), but instead use the
tools provided by Linux, otherwise important information may be lost.
Step 4: Start the program
Start the program with a double click on the program icon or enter the appropriate command
in the Terminal.
Note:
If you use the operating system package manager, the program will be entered in the Start
menu under Office Programs, Office or Graphics.
Step 5: Choose License File
With chargeable licensed versions or after expiry of a time-limited program version, the pro-
gram asks for a license file at the start. Select the appropriate license file with the suffix .vlk (see
the section Preparing the Installation).

Update License Key


A license key update is necessary when
- you want to exchange a temporary license with a final one after paying the invoice, or
- the license file supplied with the program has expired, or
- you have installed additional program modules and/or want to activate existing modules.
For the update, you need a license file (see the section Preparing the Installation).
Step 1: Start the program
Start the program. If the program cannot be started due to the expiry of the license file, the Key
Updater will start automatically. Continue with Step 3.
Step 2: Update License
Choose the menu command Help > Update License Key.
Step 3: Follow the instructions
Follow the instructions in the program.
Note:
It may be that the installation program refuses the license file, although the installation was
carried out as an Administrator. In this case it sometimes helps to reboot the program several
times. Alternatively, you can rename the license file as viva.vlk and place it in the folder
Resources of your program folder and replace the existing file viva.vlk.

19
Installation

Automated Installation (for System Administrators only)


As an administrator you can carry out an automated installation, or share the program. Particularly
on Windows, there are many programs for an automated installation. As an administrator there are
a few aspects to which particular attention should be paid.

Preferences file
In this Preferences file are contained all of the settings that can be entered in the program's
Preferences dialog. If users need certain predefined settings, you will need this file for the auto-
mated installation. This is particularly true if you need special program settings. The Preferences
file is not part of the installation, but is saved when the program quits for the first time, and is
updated when further changes are made. The Preferences file contains both preferences for the
program and preferences for documents.
To create a Preferences file for automatic installation, please proceed with the following steps:

Create Preferences file:


1. Install the program on a reference computer according to the installation instructions.
2. Start the program.
3. Choose the menu command Edit > Preferences (Windows/Linux) or VivaDesigner > Preferences
(Mac).
4. Set all the program and document preferences you require.
5. Quit the program.
6. Open the folder in which the program has saved the Preferences file. The paths are as follows:
Windows XP:
C:\Documents and Settings\[User Name]\Program Files\Viva\[VIVA Programname]\Application
[Programversion].prefs
Windows 7/8:
C:\User\[User Name]\AppData\Roaming\Viva\[VIVA Programname]\Application [Programver-
sion].prefs
Mac OS X:
Users/[User Name]/Library/Preferences/Viva/[VIVA Programname]/Application [Programver-
sion].prefs
Linux:
/home/[User Name]/.Viva/[VIVA Programname]/Application [Programversion].prefs
Example for the Variable [Programversion]: Application 7.1.prefs for Version 7.1.
Please note that some folders may be hidden and are displayed gray in the example.

20
Installation

Windows Registry
For technical reasons, NOT all program preferences are saved in the Preferences file. The Proxy
Settings for example are saved in the Windows Registry, so that the VivaFileSender can also
access this information. In this case you must extend the Windows Registry.
Since Version 7.1 (Build 7107) and 8.0 (Build 7514), the Proxy settings must be entered in
KEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/Software/Viva/VivaApp/Proxy. The software will then register the fact
that at the time of the installation there is, as yet, no user in the system. The deciding factor
here is the value in SystemScopeStamp as well as the pure Proxy settings. The value format is a
free choice (date, number or text) but must be UNIQUE.
The software checks the entry in KEY_LOCAL_MACHINE when it is started and enters these set-
tings automatically in KEY_CURRENT_USER. If the user changes the Proxy settings, then the
new settings will take effect, as long as the value in the field SystemScopeStamp has not
changed. If the value in the field SystemScopeStamp changes, the Proxy settings from
KEY_CURRENT_USER will be overwritten automatically with the Proxy settings in
KEY_LOCAL_MACHINE.

License file
If you carry out an automatic installation, you must ensure that there are individual serial
numbers for each computer, which are generally only allowed to be used on one computer. A
general license file for a corporation is only available on request.
In a manual installation the license file is saved to the user folder. The program automatically
names the file viva-x.x.vlk, whereby the variable x.x represents the program version (e.g.
viva-7.1.vlk for Version 7.1). We recommend this procedure.

Paths for the license file in the user folder:


Windows XP:
C:\Documents and Settings\[User Name]\Program Files\Viva\[VIVA Programname]\viva-[Pro-
gramversion].vlk
Windows 7/8:
C:\Users\[User Name]\AppData\Roaming\Viva\[VIVA Programname]\viva-[Programversion].vlk
Mac OS X:
Users/[User Name]/Library/Preferences/Viva/[VIVA Programname]/viva-[Programversion].vlk
Linux:
/home/[User Name]/.Viva/[VIVA Programname]/viva-[Programversion].vlk
Please note that some folders may be hidden and are displayed gray in the example. You can,
however, also place the license file directly into the program folder if no user has yet been cre-
ated on the computer, or if the computer is operated by several users. In this case the license
file is just named viva.vlk, independently of the version number.

21
Installation

Paths for the license file in the program folder:


Windows XP: C:\Programs\[VIVA Programname]\Resources\viva.vlk
Windows 7/8: C:\Program Files(x86)\[VIVA Programname]\Resources\viva.vlk
Mac OS X: Applications/[VIVA Programname]/Resources/viva.vlk
Linux: opt\viva\Resources\viva.vlk

VCP file
If you work with service providers who supply you with a communication profile, this commu-
nication profile should also be taken into account with an automated installation. With the
help of the communication profile, you can send documents with all fonts and images used to
third parties fully automatically. Please refer to the chapter in the manual entitled Package &
Send.
To enable customers in need of support to transfer test files to VIVA, the default communication
profile Viva Support with the file VIVA_Support.vcp is supplied with the program. You can
decide for yourself whether you will remove this communication profile for an automated
installation and/or install other communication profiles supplied by your service provider. The
communication profiles always have the suffix .vcp and must be placed in the folder
Resources/Services of the program folder.

22
User Interface
User Interface

User Interface
The Document Window
The basic method of handling a window is the same for all document windows. You are able to
move a single document window, scroll through the content, and change the window size if
necessary.
The program displays the document name in the title bar. To move a document window you
click on the title bar, hold down the mouse button and drag the window to its desired location.
When you need to change the document view in order to see different parts of a document you
may click the scroll arrows or use the scroll boxes to navigate through the document content.
Through the window’s size box you may reduce or enlarge the window size .
With the window’s zoom box you can zoom the document window to a size fitting your monitor.
The collapse box enables you to collapse or reveal the contents of the document window. Click-
ing on the close box closes the document.
The Rulers are displayed at the left and upper edges of the document; the Rulers may be hid-
den or displayed according to preference.
The document page is surrounded by the clipboard area where objects can be placed that shall
not be printed. You can define the display of the the clipboard area in the Colors tab of the
Program section of the Preferences.

Menus
The application provides the menu points File, Edit, Document, View and Window, which are
always available to the user. Other menu points, such as Object,Text, Table or Picture are con-
text-sensitive, i.e. relative to the editing mode. In each menu, groups of associated commands
are separated from each other by a dotted line.
Some menu commands are followed by the corresponding keyboard commands. The user may
also execute commands with these keyboard shortcuts.
Menu points ending in three dots open a dialog box for further input.
If menu points are grayed, then these functions may not be selected as long as their criteria are
not met.
Commands followed by an arrow open up further submenus. These are also called hierarchic
menus. To enter into the submenu, select the command in the main menu and then drag the
mouse to the desired command in the submenu. If you only pass over such a menu command
on your way to another menu point, the submenu does not open. Submenus are usually dis-
played to the right of the main menu point.
A Tick or Checkmark in front of a menu command indicates that this command or mode is acti-
vated. To deactivate the command or mode, the menu command must be selected again so
that the tick disappears.
24
User Interface

Standard Dialog Boxes & Palettes


Dialog Construction and Behavior
In order to be able to use several commands simultaneously, the program contains what are
called dialog boxes. Some dialog boxes relate to global settings and can be called up at any
time; others can only be called up if a document is open or the mouse pointer is in a specific
mode (e.g. Text, Picture, etc.).
The dialog boxes provide information about current settings. The program opens a dialog box
after a menu entry has been called up that ends with three dots (...) or after you have pressed
the appropriate shortcut keys. A dialog box contains various input options. Dialog boxes are
usually shown in the center of the current screen.
The name of the dialog box is shown in the center of its title bar. Dialog boxes with a title bar
can be moved on the screen. Position the mouse on the title bar and move the dialog box with
the mouse button held down. The next time the dialog box is displayed, it will be centered
again.
If dialog box areas are grayed, these functions cannot be selected as long as the conditions for
their selection do not exist.

Palette Construction and Behavior


The program provides palettes for positioning objects, applying colors or setting text attri-
butes, for example. Some palettes are used for quick selection of commands that are also
found in the menu, while other palettes offer exclusive functions that cannot be selected from
the menus. Some palettes are standard in all program versions, while others are only available
if their functionality is included in your license.
Palettes are distinctive in that they will always be positioned above all other objects and windows,
can be moved freely, and may change depending on the specific editing mode. Palettes can
only be used if a document has been opened. Once the program has been launched and a doc-
ument is open, the palettes are displayed according to the settings in the Window menu.
On Windows and Linux systems, the palettes can be anchored in a “dock” on the right hand
side of the document window. You can drag palettes on top of each other in the dock so that
they are displayed as tabs. In this way you can have a lot of palettes open and choose them by
clicking their tab. On Macintosh systems the program window dock is not available.
To move a palette, click on the title bar and drag the palette to the desired position. The new
palette position will then be displayed.
To close a palette, simply click its close box or select the appropriate command from the Window
menu. Where relevant you can also use shortcut keys.

25
User Interface

Dialog and Palette Elements

Entry Fields
The program supports absolute measurement entries in all entry fields of all palettes when
based on the following formats:
- Point Pica (abbreviated as pt)
- Point Didot (abbreviated as dd)
- Millimeters (abbreviated as mm)
- Centimeters (abbreviated as cm)
- Inches(abbreviated as in or ")
- Decimal Inches (abbreviated as dz)
- Cicero (abbreviated as c)
- Quarts (abbreviated as q)
- Degrees (abbreviated as ˚)
With the exception of those entry fields requiring degree values, absolute measurement default
values may be set in the Measurements section of the Preferences.
Relative measurement entries made in all entry fields are supported when based on the follow-
ing formats:
- Percent (abbreviated as %)
- “Em” Values (abbreviated as g)
Calculations may be performed in all entry fields. The program supports the following basic
arithmetical operations:
- Addition (abbreviated as +)
- Subtraction (abbreviated as -)
- Multiplication (abbreviated as *)
- Division (abbreviated as /)
- Potentiation (abbreviated asˆ)
Any combination of measurement units can be used in all calculations. Possible combinations
are, however, restricted to values of the same type. Absolute values, for instance, can be calcu-
lated only with other absolute values (e.g. 30 mm + 10 pt), and relative values only with relative
values (e.g. 120% - 30%). In addition, all set levels are supported.
For example, you may use the following calculation combinations:
- 200 + (34 - 12*3) + (4*5)
- (5 * 3mm) + (2c - 7dd)
- 7mm * (5pt / 3pt)
26
User Interface

With multiplication and division, only one operand (format) may be used per field. Therefore
the following entries would be invalid:
- (34mm - 12" * 3dd) + (4pt * 5c)
- (5" * 3mm) + (2" * 5,7pt)
Fractions my also be entered. The following are some examples:
- 1/3 mm (equals 0,33...3 Millimeter)
- 4/15 mm (equals 0,266...6 Millimeter)
- 2/5 " (equals 0,4 Inches)
If a palette contains several entry fields, they can be selected with the Tab key if the mouse has
been clicked inside one of the entry fields.

Checkboxes and Radio Buttons


Checkboxes indicate whether or not a command will be executed. The command will be exe-
cuted if the check box contains a tick or checkmark. The command will not be executed if the
check box is empty.
The checkbox is grayed when the elements of the selected command field have different attri-
butes. If the checkbox is grayed, the command will be ignored.
Radio buttons determine which one of several possible commands is executed. Only one com-
mand from a number of options may be applied.

Pop-Up Menus
A large number of setting options are displayed in what are called pop-up menus. The pop-up
menu displays a list of available settings as well as the last used setting, which is designated
by a dot or checkmark. A new selection automatically deselects the previous one.
Certain pop-up menus allow multiple selections at one time, which are marked in the usual
way. A new selection will serve to deactivate all of the previously selected options, as in the
example of selecting Normal text to deselect all other attributes. Some pop-up menus only
become available after another selection is made.
In addition to regular selection choices, some pop-up menus also contain options such as
Undefined or None. These options are actually indicating that the actual existing settings
remain untouched. To avoid accidentally changing an existing setting, position the mouse
pointer so that no selection is highlighted, and then release the mouse button.
Command areas
To simplify complex dialog boxes, command areas are used. Command areas have a frame and
a title, and incorporate several related commands in one box.
Lists and Buttons
Dialog boxes may also contain lists of entries. The user is able to move around in these selec-
tion lists using the scroll bars, scroll arrows, and arrow keys. Dialog boxes in the program con-
tain normal buttons and default buttons. Buttons surrounded by double frames are considered
default buttons, i.e., they are executed automatically if the Return key or Enter key are pressed
27 on the keyboard.
User Interface

Program Palettes
The Toolbar lets you create and modify objects. The use and function of the Toolbar is
described in detail in the chapter Working with Objects.
The term Module palette is a generic term for all module-oriented palettes. Various functions
such as Object mode, Picture mode and Text mode are described as modules. The Object mode
displays an Object palette, the Text mode a Text palette and the Picture mode a Picture palette.
The palette name Module is always shown, whichever mode you are in.
- The Object palette in Object mode allows the rapid definition of object co-ordinates and
attributes. The use and function of the Object palette is described in detail in the chapter
Working with Objects.
- The Text palette in Text mode allows the rapid definition of text attributes for the current
text chain or Story. The Story is divided into Chapter, Layout, Paragraph and Character
tabs, each of which have individual attributes. The use and function of the Text palette is
described in detail in the chapter Working with Text.
- The Picture Palette in Picture mode allows the rapid definition of picture attributes for a
selected image or picture. The use and function of the Picture palette is described in detail
in the chapter Working with Pictures.
The Page palette fulfills a series of varying functions. As well as the rapid selection of single
pages of the document it displays the document page(s) in different page order (Facing Pages
or Single Pages), shows the page numbering, enables the option of displaying either Alias
pages or document pages, the linking of Alias pages to document pages as well as movement
and deletion of individual document pages and thumbnail page previews. The use and func-
tion of the Page Layout palette is described in detail in the chapter Working with Pages.
The Style Sheets palette serves for the rapid application of defined Style Sheets to text, objects
and pictures. The use and function of the Style Sheets palette is described in detail in the chap-
ter Working with Style Sheets.
The Trapping palette determines the behavior of individual objects when printing in color. If
Automatic trapping mode is selected, the program traps the selected background color
according to a specific algorithm. Manual indicates the spread or choke value for the color
being trapped and a background color. Overprint indicates that the selected shape containing
that color will overprint the shape containing the background color.
The Search and Replace palette is for searching for and replacing text. The functions are
described in the chapter Working with Text.
The Spell and Grammar Check palette’s functions are described in the chapter Working with
Text.
The Character Map is similar to the one provided by your operating system, but is more flexible
in its functionality. The palette’s functions are described in the chapter The Character Map
Palette.
The Character Inspector is intended for use with single characters or combinations of two or
more characters (Graphemes). These often occur in Arabic texts, for example. You can manipu-
late the position of the character in the line and even improve the optical appearance of a
Grapheme by moving a part of it.
28
User Interface

There are further program palettes available. Whether these appear or not depends on your
program license. Please check the PDF file VD7-Editions in your installer package to see which
additional functions and palettes are included in your license.
The functions available in the Layer palette are described in the chapter Working with Layers.
The Colors palette gives you an overview of all the colors available to you and enables you to
apply a color to a marked text with a single click. In object mode you can apply a color (or a
blend) as a fill color, and also apply a color (not a blend) to the object frame.
Pictures: This is a special library palette where not only document pictures are shown, but also
images from other documents that have been saved in the library with their paths as Favorites.
The palette also includes an “explorer” function to display images stored in any folder on any
drive accessible to your computer or recently imported images as well as a search function.
This will be described in the chapter Working with Pictures.

System Dialog Boxes


In addition to the setting options in standard dialog boxes, the program also has its own dialog
boxes for opening documents or files and ofr importing text and pictures. You can use these
dialogs or opt to use your standard system dialog.
The scrolling list shows the contents of the currently selected disk drive or folder. You browse
through the list with the arrow keys or select a file by entering one or more characters. This will
select the first file that begins with this character. If there is no file beginning with that letter,
the first file beginning with the next letter in the alphabet will be highlighted.
Double-clicking the name opens the file or folder. If the name was only selected, opening is
accomplished by clicking the Open button or pressing the Return or Enter key.
The selection name reflects the name of the disk drive or the folder name.
The scroll bar and corresponding arrows permit browsing within the list in order to display
documents/files or folders that are not visible in the displayed screen portion.
The characters following the disk drive symbol reflect the current data medium.
In addition to the Open command, the Save or Save As command also prompts the naming of
files. Incorrect entries will be addressed by a alert dialog box. Thereafter, the user may try to
save and name the document again. If the document is to be saved in a new folder, you must
create a new folder using the context menu and then select it to save the file.

Errors, Warnings and Queries


In addition to the standard dialogs and system dialogs, the program provides error boxes,
alert boxes and query boxes.The error box appears when a command cannot be fulfilled for a
specific reason. Alert boxes appear when a command could lead to a result that the user under
certain circumstances does not want. The user has the option of continuing the potentially
dangerous action or cancelling. Query boxes appear if there are several way of executing a
command. The user must then decide how the program should act.

29
Working with Documents
Working with Documents

Working with Documents


Introduction
You interact with the application through the creation of a new document or
the modification of an existing document. Therefore, after the application has
started, you will always create a new document, or open an existing document.
This chapter describes how the application interacts with documents.

Open Document
There are three ways to open existing documents. You can open a document with a double-
click on the document icon, or you can use the Open command in the File menu or the shortcut
keys.
When a document is opened through a double-click, the application is launched automatically,
and the document is opened.
When a document is opened from within the application, the VIVA dialog box will appear to
prompt you for the name of the file to be opened. This dialog also shows by default a preview
of the document if the document has been saved with the Page Preview options in the Pages
tab of the Pages & Objects section of the Preferences.

Open Document with Open command:


1. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + O (Windows/Linux) or Command + O (Mac).
- Select the menu command File > Open.
2. Choose the type of document in the pop-up menu Format if necessary.
3. Select a document in the dialog and click on the Open button.
During the opening of a document the application will display a progress bar which shows the
status of the opening operation.
The application also allows the opening of different documents from other applications
through special filters. These filters are provided by Viva and are subject to change. If error
messages are shown while opening a document, please contact Viva using the menu command
Help > Send a Message to Viva.

31
Working with Documents

Closing Documents
A document can be closed by clicking the close box, with the menu command File > Close or the
shortcut keys. .

Close a document with the close box:


Click the close box in the upper right (Windows/Linux) or left (Mac) corner of the document
window.

Close document with the Close command:


Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + W (Windows/Linux) or Command + W (Mac).
- Select the menu command File > Close.
If you made any changes since you last saved the document a dialog box will appear prompting
you to save the document or cancel the command.

Revert to saved document


When you have made changes to an existing document which subsequently you do not want to
save, you can use one of the three following methods:
- You can undo all the changes you have made manually, insofar as you know which
changes you have made.
- You can close the document and when prompted to save the document choose the Don’t
Save option, and subsequently open the original document again.
- By far the easiest way is to use the menu command File > Revert to Saved or use the
appropriate shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + Shift + Z (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option +
Shift + Z (Mac). This will accomplish at once all the steps mentioned in the previous
option.

Creating new documents


When creating a new document it is helpful to understand what kind of document you will
need to generate. It is always possible to make changes afterwards but it saves you time if you
choose the correct settings before you start working on a new document.

Create a new document:


Do one of the following:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + N (Windows/Linux) or Command + N (Mac).
- Choose the menu command File > New.

32
Working with Documents

Once you have chosen the New command the Document Setup dialog box will open. This dialog
box allows you to enter specific options regarding the Page Size. The application enables you
to set the Page Layout and see the Page Preview, a preview of the Page Size and Page Layout
settings you have currently selected.
The Page Size and the Page Layout are the elementary ingredients of any document.
1. The Page Size definition consists of the Size, Orientation and Page Type. First choose the
page size:
- Choose a size from the Standard popup menu to select one of the default page sizes.
Once a selection is made in the popup menu the corresponding settings are activated.
The dimensions of the active standard page size are visible in the Custom Size entry field,
and these are editable once the Custom option is selected.
- To define or change the dimensions of a Custom page, activate the Custom option and
enter the appropriate values in the Width (W) and Height (H) fields.
2. Choose the Portrait or Landscape option from the popup menu Orientation.
3. Choose the option Single Pages or Facing Pages from the Page Type popup menu. It is
important to know which page type you want to have as this option cannot be changed
once the document has been created.
- When Single Page is selected in the Page Type popup, the entry fields Left and Right are
made available as Page Layout options.
- When the Facing Pages option is selected these entry fields will read Inner and Outer
respectively.
4. The Page Layout option in the application defines the part(s) of the page devoted to text.
Page layout consists of the text body, headers, footers, margins and annotations. This con-
cept has its roots in book production but is nowadays used for all types of publications. The
Page Layout is defined by the four distances from the page sides. When the Facing Pages
layout is used the application will automatically mirror the page layout.
- Lengthy lines of more than 40 characters are tiring to the eye and in general to be
avoided. For this purpose a page layout is often divided in two or more columns.
- When a choice is made regarding the amount of columns there is an essential difference
between a situation where it is necessary to get as much text as possible in a limited
amount of space, or a situation where the visual appeal of the layout is critical. The more
columns are used the less text is possible, the more freedom of form in the placement of
text, pictures or other graphic elements is possible. Whenever you need to design an
effective layout you are advised to consult the professional literature.
- You can define the layout by means of six entry fields and the two Page Layout options.
The Page Preview option gives immediate feedback about the choices made.
- The option Autom. Text Object defines whether or not a text object will be created auto-
matically on the first Alias page or first document page. The dimensions of the text
object will be calculated from the values entered in the Page Layout entry fields, and a
corresponding view will appear in the Page Preview section.
- The Grid option ensures whether or not the a grid of Guide objects will be created on the
33 first Alias or document page. These Guide objects are magnetic b< default.
Working with Documents

- The entry fields Top, Bottom, Left and Right or respectively Inner and Outer define the
distance between the Automatic Text Object and/or the guide objects and the edges of
the page.
- The Column and Gutter entry fields define the number of columns and the distance
between them. The Page Preview shows the current settings.
5. If you already know in advance how many pages your document should have, then you can
make an entry in the Number field of the Insert Pages section.
6. Click OK to confirm the current settings.
- The application will now create a new document and automatically name it Untitled.
Documents created subsequently are automatically numbered consecutively to prevent
confusion.
- The document name can be assigned or changed at any time through the Save or Save As
commands.
- The size and orientation of the document and the Auto Text Box and grid settings in the
application can be changed at any time through the menu command File > Document
Setup.
- Be aware of the relationship between Alias Pages, the Auto Text Box and the Grid as
described in the chapter Working with Pages. The meaning of the Grid as a collection/
combination of Guide objects is described in the chapter Working with Objects.

Summary Document Creation:


- New documents are created by selecting the File > New command or with the shortcut keys.
- Essential for the creation of any document is the Page Size, which determines the dimen-
sions of the pages used in the document.
- Optional in the application is the Layout with a default text object (Autom Text Object)
and/or a magnetic Grid which allows objects to align with this grid automatically.

34
Working with Documents

Saving Documents
The application allows you to save documents in a number of ways. A distinction is made
between:
- Saving a new document
- Saving a modified document
- Saving a document under a different name
- Saving a document with a preview of the first page
- Saving a document with a preview of all pages
New documents are automatically named Untitled. Those which are subsequently created are
numbered consecutively. Documents are saved by selecting the Save and Save As commands
from the File menu or by using the shortcut keys. In either case the application will display a
dialog box in which you will be able to enter the document name and the location where you
want to save the document.
In addition, you can specify the document format. The application supports not only the VIVA
standard document format *desd but also the InDesign Markup Language *.idml and the VIVA
XML formats. Please refer to the relevant chapters of the manual for further information.
Finally, you can specify in the Document Preferences whether a preview of the first document
page or a preview of all the document pages is to be saved with the document.
Modified documents are saved through the menu command File > Save or with the appropriate
shortcut keys. The application will then save the document without prompting you for a docu-
ment name.
It may happen that you want to save a copy of your document with some small changes. In this
case you may use the menu command File > Save As or the corresponding shortcut keys. This
will save a copy of your current document under a new document name of your choice and the
newly saved document will remain open.

Save a new document:


1. Do one of the following:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + S or Ctrl + Alt + S (Windows/Linux), or Command + S or Com-
mand + Option + S (Mac).
- Choose one of the commands Save or Save As in the File menu .
2. Enter the name for your new document and click OK.

Save a new document with Preview:


1. Choose the menu command Edit > Preferences (Windows/Linux) or VivaDesigner > Preferences
(Mac).
2. Choose the section Pages & Objects and click the Pages tab.
3. Click both the checkboxes Save small preview and Save large preview.

35
Working with Documents

4. Choose the option All Pages or Manual. If you choose Manual, you must set the number of
page previews to be saved.
5. Click OK to confirm and close the Preferences dialog.
6. Do one of the following:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + S or Ctrl + Alt + S (Windows/Linux), or Command + S or Com-
mand + Option + S (Mac).
- Choose one of the commands Save or Save As in the File menu .
7. Enter the name for your new document and click OK.

Save an existing document:


Do one of the following:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + S (Windows/Linux), or Command + S (Mac).
- Choose the menu command File > Save.

Save a document with a different name:


1. Do one of the following:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + S (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + S (Mac).
- Choose the menu command File > Save As .
2. Enter the name for your new document and click OK.

Document views
After starting the application and the creation of a new document a document window and
several application palettes will appear. In the chapter User Interface and other chapters, we
will describe the purpose and use of the different palettes. First of all we will describe the docu-
ment window, document views and document specific views. We will differentiate between
application and document specific views.
With application specific views we mean the appearance and position of the application pal-
ettes. By document specific views we mean the size and position of document windows such as
the active document view and the magnification factor.

Hide and show palettes


A palette can be hidden in three ways.
To hide a palette, click the close box , or select and click the appropriate item in the View menu
or press the keys assigned to that palette (if available).
To show a palette again, select and click the appropriate item in the View menu or press the
keys assigned to that palette (if available).

36
Working with Documents

On Windows and Linux systems, the program provides a palette dock on the right hand side of
the program window. Generally palettes will be displayed in the dock as default. You may like
to have a number of palettes open in the dock, so an additional feature is to stack the palettes
over one another. In this case they will be shown as tabs and are easily selectable.
Note:
If your current document contains a Style Sheet operating with the same key combination
that has been assigned to a palette, then the palette activation and de-activation function of
this key will take precedence and the key combination will not work for the Style Sheet.

Selecting Open documents


Open documents can be selected either interactively or through the menu command.
To select a document interactively you click a document window. When you click outside the
document window or program window, you are automatically switched to the Explorer (Win-
dows/Linux) or the Finder (Mac) without quitting the application or closing any documents.
You can simply return to the application by clicking the document or program window once
again.
- When you are editing several documents at a time it is easy to lose track of a specific doc-
ument. For this purpose the application allows you to select a specific document through
the View menu. All open documents will be shown in the order in which they are opened.
The current document will be shown with a tick or checkmark before its name.

Stack and Tile Windows (multiple documents)


Document windows can have very different dimensions. In order to manage multiple document
windows, you can use the Stack Windows or Tile Windows commands from the Window menu.
When using the Stack Windows command all documents will be shown behind each other with
a certain distance between them so that you can easily check the number of open documents.
This is the same as the Cascade command in other programs.
The Tile Windows command divides the documents as evenly as possible over the program
window (Windows/Linux) or the screen (Mac). If for example you have three documents open,
one document will take half the available space while the other two will share the other half,
taking each a quarter of the total space available.
You may find this less convenient, particularly for comparing, proofing or correcting docu-
ments. The program offers two further functions in the View > Window menu:
- Arrange Windows Horizontal
- Arrange Windows Vertical
The command Arrange Windows Horizontal stretches the document windows horizontally
across the available space above one another in a column form. The heights of the windows are
calculated exactly according to the space available.
The command Arrange Windows Vertical stretches the document windows vertically so that
their height corresponds to the vertical space available, and places them next to one another in
a row. The widths of the windows are calculated exactly according to the space available.
37
Working with Documents

Tile a single document window


If the document you are working on has many pages, you may need to refer to different pages
for information while continuing to work on one page. One simple example is a manual with a
drawing or diagram on one page with numbered parts, while the text referring to those parts
runs over several pages. Switching back and forth between pages would be an irritating chore,
so the program provides two commands in the Window menu:
- Tile Document Window Horizontally
- Tile Document Window Vertically
The command Tile Document Window Horizontally splits the space available into two equal
parts next to each other, while the command Tile Document Window Vertically splits the space
available into two equal parts above one another. Please note the following points:
1. When you have tiled your document window, you can adjust the tiling proportion manually
by moving the mouse pointer over the Window splitter until it changes to the tile sizing
pointer and then with the mouse button held down drag the tiling barrier left/right or up/
down to suit your wishes.
2. You can move about the document and scroll between pages in both viewing sections.
3. You can apply different zoom factors to the different sections.
4. You can apply a tiling command to a section (sub-tiling).
5. To cancel the tiling, choose the menu command Window > Cancel Tiling, close the document
or choose the menu command File > Revert to Saved.

Document zoom
The choice and use of a zoom factor for document viewing is an important part of your interac-
tion with the application. You can either zoom out to get an overview of the document or zoom
in to inspect smaller details.
The zoom factor is applied to the current document. The current zoom factor of a document will
be saved with the document settings, upon opening these will automatically apply. You can
apply a zoom between 1% and 1000%.
There are several ways to enter and change the zoom factor : the commands in the View menu
and their shortcut keys, the Zoom tool and the Zoom factor field in the Toolbar.
Through the zoom factors in the View menu it is possible to magnify the document view to
1000% or reduce it to 50%. The most commonly used scaling factors are also available through
shortcut keys. The advantage of using the shortcut keys is that the edit mode will not change.
Fit Page in Window is a special command. When this command is selected the current page is
resized to fit the screen. When the zoom factor is reduced you will get fully editable thumbnails
of the page(s) in your document.
Fit Spread in Window is a special command. When this command is selected the current spread
(generally two pages) is resized to fit the screen. When the zoom factor is reduced you will get
fully editable thumbnails of the pages in your document.

38
Working with Documents

The next option to select a zoom factor is through the Zoom tool which you select from the
Toolbar. You can choose between the Zoom in and the Zoom out tools.
In order to zoom in on or out from a screen area, move to this area with . Simply click the
mouse to zoom in or out. To zoom in on a specific area, hold down the mouse button and drag
a rectangle. when you release the mouse button, the area selected with the rectangle will be
zoomed proportionally to fit the document window,
Another option for selecting a scaling factor is the Zoom factor field in the Toolbar. Through
this field the document zoom can be resized in 1% increments from 1% to 1000%.

Select zoom scale through menu commands:


Select the appropriate Zoom factor from the View menu.

Zoom with Zoom tool:


1. Select the appropriate tool (Zoom in or Zoom out) in the Toolbar.
2. Hold down the mouse button and drag a rectangle over the area required.

Modify zoom factor with the Zoom factor field:


1. Do one of the following:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + V (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + V (Mac).
- Mark the Zoom factor manually with the mouse in the Zoom factor field of the Toolbar.
2. Enter the appropriate zoom scale factor and press the Tab, Return or Enter key .

39
Working with Documents

Presentation Mode
The Presentation Mode offers a further possibility of displaying the document. While in the normal
layout mode the document window is shown, the Presentation Mode displays the document as
a page on the screen without window, palettes or menu. With this you can get an excellent pic-
ture of the optical effect of the document pages. You can also use the Presentation Mode to
create and show demonstrations.

Activate Presentation Mode:


Do one of the following:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + 9 (Windows/Linux) or Command + 9 (Mac).
- Choose the menu command View > Presentation Mode.
The program will now center and display the current page on a black background. If there are
overlaps over the edge of the page they are automatically cut out, and Guides, but not Guide
Objects, are temporarily switched off. In this page display the program recognises the modes
Single Page or Facing Pages.

Leave Presentation Mode:


Click once with the mouse or press the Esc (Escape)key.
In Presentation Mode you can scroll through the pages using the arrow-up and arrow-down
keys and change the zoom factor with the plus or minus keys, or with the scroll wheel of your
mouse.

40
Working with Objects
Working with Objects

Working with Objects


Introduction
Whenever you need to enter text, to place pictures or create graphic elements
you will need to create objects. Objects may be modified after they are cre-
ated, their form, position, type, color and other object properties can all be
modified.

This chapter will show you how to create and modify objects. Even if you are
familiar with other illustration or layout programs we advise you to read this
chapter carefully since it will give you in-depth information on the sometimes
unique possibilities of Viva products.

The Toolbar
Through the Toolbar you are able to create new or modify existing objects.
The following tools are available from the Toolbar:

- Rectangle tool (Text, Picture and Graphic Objects)


- Ellipse tool (Text, Picture and Graphic Objects)
- Polygon tool (Text, Picture and Graphic Objects)
- Line tool
- Orthogonal Line tool
- Multiple line tool
Other objects like for instance Bézier objects or Bézier curves, circular objects
etc. can be created through the modification of other objects.

All objects can either be modified interactively or by means of the available


menu or keyboard commands. How this is done is described in the following
sections.

42
Working with Objects

Creating objects
To create an object, select the appropriate Object Tool from the Toolbar. We see a difference
between closed objects (rectangle, oval or polygon) and line objects as well as between original
and Alias objects. To learn how to create and work with Alias objects, please refer to the section
Working with Alias Objects.
Objects can be created on the document page or on the pasteboard beside the page. Objects
can also be created over several pages in Facing Page Mode.
While creating an object the application gives you feedback about the size and form of the
object through a dotted imaginary line, which shows you the object‘s appearance when you
release the mouse button. The Ruler and the Module Palette also give information about the
size and position of the object created.
TIP:
- Objects that touch the edge of the page should run over between 3 and 5 mm into the clip-
board area (bleed).
- When creating objects, check the information in the Ruler and in the Module Palette.
- Refer to the sections Objects with predefined settings and Create Alias Objects.

Creating closed objects


To create a rectangle/square, an oval/circle or a polygon, select the appropriate tool from the
Toolbar.

Create a rectangle or square interactively:


1. Choose a tool for a rectangular object from the Toolbar:
- Choose Rectangular Graphic Object to create a rectangular graphic object.
- Choose Rectangular Text Object (Type 1) to create a rectangular text object with text run-
ning from left to right.
- Choose Rectangular Text Object (Type 2) to create a rectangular text object with text
running from right to left (e.g. for Arabic, Hebrew, etc.).
- Choose Rectangular Text Object (Type 3) to create a rectangular text object with text
running from top to bottom (e.g. for Chinese, etc.).
- Choose Rectangular Picture Object to create a rectangular picture object.
2. Click in the document window on the position where the object should be created and hold
down the mouse button.
3. Keep the mouse button held down and move the mouse in any direction.
- Hold down the Shift key as well if you want to create a square.
4. Release the mouse button when the object has the desired size.
As well as the interactive creation of a rectangle or square with the mouse, a rectangle or
square may be created automatically. No object should already be selected since it would be
modified.

43
Working with Objects

Create a rectangle/square automatically:


1. Choose one of the following options to create a graphic object:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Shift + G (Windows/Linux) or Command-Shift + G (Mac).
- Select the menu command Object > Content > Graphic.
2. Choose one of the following options to create a text object:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Shift + T (Windows/Linux) or Command-Shift + T (Mac).
- Select the menu command Object > Content > Text.
3. Select one of the following options to create a picture object:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Shift + B (Windows/Linux) or Command-Shift + B (Mac).
- Select the menu command Object > Content > Picture.
The object will now be created at the upper left sector of the document page and selected. With
an additional option you can modify the radius of the angle.

Create a curved rectangle:


1. Create a rectangle.
2. Select one of the following options:
- Enter a value in the Radius field of the Frame section of the Object Settings dialog or
choose a value from the popup menu.
- Enter a value in the Radius field of the Module palette or choose a value from the popup
menu
Reference:
With the rectangle tool you can also create derivative forms such as parallelograms. Please
refer to the section Skew objects.
Create an oval/circle interactively:
1. Choose a tool for an oval object from the Toolbar:
- Choose Oval Graphic Object to create a oval graphic object.
- Choose Oval Text Object (Type 1) to create a oval text object with text running from left
to right.
- Choose Oval Text Object (Type 2) to create a oval text object with text running from right
to left (e.g. for Arabic, Hebrew, etc.).
- Choose Oval Text Object (Type 3) to create a oval text object with text running from top
to bottom (e.g. for Chinese, etc.).
- Choose Oval Picture Object to create a oval picture object.
2. Click in the document window on the position where the object should be created and hold
down the mouse button.
3. Keep the mouse button held down and move the mouse in any direction.
44 - Hold down the Shift key as well if you want to create a circle.
Working with Objects

4. Release the mouse button when the object has the desired size.
Reference:
With the oval tool you can also create derivative forms such as half circles. Please refer to
the section Delete handles.
Create a polygon:
1. Choose a tool for an polygon object from the Toolbar:
- Choose Polygonal Graphic Object to create a polygonal graphic object.
- Choose Polygonal Text Object (Type 1) to create a polygonal text object with text running
from left to right.
- Choose Polygonal Text Object (Type 2) to create a polygonal text object with text run-
ning from right to left (e.g. for Arabic, Hebrew, etc.).
- Choose Polygonal Text Object (Type 3) to create a polygonal text object with text run-
ning from top to bottom (e.g. for Chinese, etc.).
- Choose Polygonal Picture Object to create a polygonal picture object.
2. Click in the document window on the position where the object should be created and hold
down the mouse button.
3. Keep the mouse button held down and move the mouse in any direction.
- Hold down the Shift key as well if you want to draw a line segment at an angle of 0 (zero)
or 90 degrees.
4. Click the mouse button once to complete a line segment and move the graphic object
pointer in any direction to create the next line segment.
5. Repeat this for every line segment.
6. Double-click to complete and close the drawing process. The line segments will be con-
nected automatically.
Reference:
With the Polygon tool you can also create Bézier objects.

Create line objects


The program makes three tools available to you which allow you to draw lines. The application
differs between the tools for drawing a
- straight line with any angle,
- an orthogonal straight line and
- a multiple line consisting of several line segments.

Create a simple straight line:


1. Select the Line tool from the Toolbar.
2. Click on the document page in the document window and hold down the mouse button.

45 3. Move the mouse in any direction while holding down the mouse button.
Working with Objects

- Hold down the Shift key to draw an orthogonal straight line with an angle of 0 (zero), 45
or 90 degrees.
4. Release the mouse button when your line is of the required length.

Create an orthogonal line:


1. Choose the Orthogonal Line tool from the Toolbar.
2. Click on the document page in the document window and hold down the mouse button.
3. Move the mouse in any direction while holding down the mouse button. The orthogonal line
follows the horizontal or vertical position of the mouse pointer. The orthogonal line will
however change its direction by 45 degrees when the angle between the line and the mouse
pointer is greater than 22,5 degrees.
- Hold down the Shift key to draw a straight line with any angle.
4. Release the mouse button when your line is of the required length.
TIP:
To make an angled line from an orthogonal line and vice versa, hold down the Shift key when
editing or drawing.
Create a multiple line:
1. Choose the Multiple Line tool from the Toolbar.
2. Click the mouse pointer in the document window on the position where the object should be
displayed and hold down the mouse button.
3. Move the mouse in any direction while holding down the mouse button.
- Hold down the Shift key when a line segment with an angle of 0 (zero) or 90 degrees
should be drawn.
4. Click the mouse button once to complete a line segment and move the mouse pointer in any
direction to create the next line segment.
5. Repeat this for every additional line segment.
6. Double-click to complete and close the drawing process.

46
Working with Objects

Summary Creating Objects


- Rectangles are created with a Rectangle tool in the Toolbar. By holding down the Shift key
a square will be created.
- To create a rectangle automatically, select the appropriate object type in the Object menu
or use the corresponding shortcut keys:
- Graphic object: Ctrl + Shift + G (Windows/Linux) or Command + Shift + G (Mac)
- Text object: Ctrl + Shift + T (Windows/Linux) or Command + Shift + T (Mac)
- Picture object: Ctrl + Shift + B (Windows/Linux) or Command + Shift + B (Mac)
- Make sure no object is already selected before using the command.
- Rectangles with rounded corners can be created with the help of the Radius option in the
Module palette or the Object Settings dialog.
- Ellipses/Ovals are created with an Oval tool in the Toolbar. Holding down the Shift key
while drawing automatically creates circles.
- Simple straight lines are created through the Line tool in the Tool-bar. Holding down the
Shift key while drawing automatically creates vertical or horizontal orthogonal lines.
- Orthogonal lines are drawn through the Orthogonal Line tool in the Toolbar. Holding down
the Shift key while drawing automatically creates diagonal lines.
- Multiple lines are drawn through the Multiple Line tool in the Tool-bar. Holding down the
Shift key while drawing automatically creates only horizontal or vertical line segments. A
double-click completes the creation of a multiple line.
- Polygons are drawn through the Polygon tool in the Toolbar. Holding down the Shift key
while drawing automatically creates only horizontal or vertical line segments. A double-
click completes the creation of a polygon and the first and last line segments will be con-
nected.
- Open curves are created by converting multiple lines. Position the mouse pointer on the
sizing handle of a multiple line and hold the Ctrl key Windows/Linux/Mac) and the mouse
button down, stretch the handle by moving the mouse. The corresponding mouse pointer
will be displayed.
- Closed curves are created by converting a polygon. Position the mouse pointer on a sizing
handle of the polygon and hold the Ctrl key (Windows/Linux/Mac) and the mouse button
down, stretch the handle by moving the mouse. The corresponding mouse pointer will be
displayed.
- A newly created object will have the same graphic properties as a previously created
object if the previously created object is selected before the appropriate object tool is acti-
vated in the Toolbar.
- One or more Alias objects can be created from any original object.
- One or more Alias objects can also be created from any Alias object.

47
Working with Objects

Selecting objects
As soon as the mouse pointer is positioned on top of a graphic object or its frame the Object
pointer is displayed. This mouse pointer shows you that the object can be selected by means of
a mouse-click. The same is true if you move the mouse pointer to the frame of a text or picture
object, and here there is an additional feature: As soon as you move the mouse over the surface
of a text or picture object, the mouse pointer will change into an I-beam (text) or grabber hand
(picture), while a gray selection button appears in the middle of the object. If you move the
mouse over the button, the mouse pointer will change into the Object pointer.
After the mouse-click the selection handles are shown. The term selection handles describes the
sizing handles and control handles of an object. Lines and polygons have selection handles at
every corner point. Ellipses/ovals and rectangles always have eight selection points. As well as
the display of the selection handles, the attributes applied to the object appear in the Object
Palette (Module Palette in Object mode). If the Object Palette is visible, its co-ordinates are dis-
played.

Select objects with a mouse-click:


1. Choose one of the following options:
- Position the mouse pointer on a closed graphic object or a line.
- Position the mouse pointer on the object frame of a picture or text object.
- Position the mouse pointer on the picture or text object and hold down the Ctrl key
(Windows/Linux) or the Command key (Mac).
- Position the mouse pointer on the gray selection button in the middle of the picture or
text object.
2. Click the mouse button as soon as the Object pointer is shown.
3. To select several objects, repeat points 1 and 2 while holding down the Shift key.
4. To select a hidden object that is completely covered by other objects, hold down the keys
Ctrl + Alt + Windows + Shift (Windows/Linux) or Ctrl + Alt + Command + Shift (Mac) and click
the mouse button repeatedly until the required object is selected. This procedure may be
repeated as often as you like. All objects whose surface is under the mouse pointer position
will be found.
Objects can also be selected by dragging an imaginary rectangle over them.

Select objects through dragging:


1. Position the mouse pointer somewhere on the page where there is no object.
2. Hold down the mouse button and drag the selection rectangle in the direction of the objects
you want to select.
3. Release the mouse button when the selection rectangle covers all the objects you wanted to
select.

48
Working with Objects

Select all objects:


Choose one of the following options:
- Select the menu command Edit > Select All from the menu.
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + A (Windows/Linux) or Command + A (Mac).
In single page mode all objects on the page and on the pasteboard area will be selected. In
facing page mode, all the objects on the left and right hand page and also on the pasteboard
area will be selected.
REFERENCE:
The program offers the possibility of steering the selection of certain objects (e.g. Guide
objects, Alias objects, etc.). If one or more objects cannot be selected, please refer to the sec-
tions Working with Guide Objects and Working with Alias Objects.
The program offers several possibilities for deselecting an object:

Deselect all selected objects:


Choose one of the following options:
- Position the mouse pointer somewhere on the page where there is no object and click the
mouse button.
- Hold down the Shift key and click the frame of the object to be deselected or use the
dragging method.
- Hold down the Shift key and click the gray selection button in the middle of a picture or
text object.
- Select another object.

49
Working with Objects

Summary Selecting objects


- Objects are selected through the Object pointer.
- In Single Page Mode, only objects on the current page and the Pasteboard area are select-
able.
- In Facing Page Mode all objects on both left and right hand pages as well as on the Paste-
board area are selectable.
- All objects on the current page can be selected with the command Edit > Select All or with
the shortcut keys Ctrl + A (Windows/Linux) or Command + A (Mac).
- When the mouse pointer is over a text or picture object the Ctrl key (Windows/Linux) or
Command key (Mac) must be pressed to select the object if you do not want to position the
mouse pointer exactly on the frames of these objects.
- Selection handles of original objects are filled blue square points (sizing handles) and
round points (control handles).
- Selection handles of Alias objects are filled light blue points and their control handles are
filled light blue round points.
- Multiple objects can be selected by dragging the selection rectangle in the direction of the
objects you want to select.or by holding down the the key and clicking each object with
the mouse. If the objects are text or picture objects, then the Ctrl key (Windows/Linux) or
Command key (Mac) must also be held down.
- To select hidden objects, the Ctrl + Alt + Windows-Shift (Windows/Linux) or Ctrl + Option +
Command + Shift (Mac) shortcut keys and the mouse button must be pressed until the
selection handles of the object are shown.

50
Working with Objects

Positioning objects
The program provides many options for the positioning of objects. You can move, align or dis-
tribute objects.

Move objects
In selecting objects you have already met the graphic mouse pointer whose arrowheads point
in all four directions. This pointer is also used for moving objects.

Move object with the mouse:


1. Select one or more objects.
2. Hold down the mouse button AND the Ctrl key (Windows/Linux) or the Command key (Mac)
and move the mouse in the preferred direction.
- While moving the objects with the mouse, hold down the Shift key to move the objects
only horizontally or vertically.
When the Object palette is active the current position of the object is shown exactly as soon as
you release the mouse button.

Move/nudge object with the keyboard:


1. Select one or more objects.
2. Use the arrow nudge keys on the keyboard to move or nudge objects one screen pixel at a
time in the appropriate zoom factor:
- Press the Nudge-Right key or the Nudge-Left key to move/nudge objects horizontally.
- Press the Nudge-Up key or the Nudge-Down key to move/nudge objects vertically.
During object dragging the outer dimension of the object is shown. You can now move the
object around on the current page or to other pages. When the ruler is active the position of the
active object is indicated by means of unconnected lines in the ruler display area, so that a rel-
atively exact positioning is possible.
When the Object palette is active the current position of the object is shown exactly.
Apart from the interactive positioning of objects it is also possible to do this in a precise manner
through various commands. We will differentiate between absolute and relative positioning.
- Absolute positioning means the selected objects are moved to a specific position. The
application offers you two ways to do this : through the Object Settings dialog or through
the Object palette.
- Relative moving means the selected objects will be moved with a specified factor.

Move objects with the Module palette:


1. Select one or more objects.
2. Enter the required co-ordinates in the entry field X or Y of the Module palette:
- Replace the values in the entry fields to position the objects absolutely.
51
Working with Objects

- Enter a factor (e.g. +10) to move the objects relatively. Positive values move the objects to
the right or downwards. Negative values move the objects to the left or upwards.
3. As an extra option you can select the reference point for the X and Y co-ordinates. The
default reference point is Top Left. The default reference point for lines and orthogonal lines
is Start.

Move objects with the Object Settings dialog:


1. Select one or more objects.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Double-click one of the selected objects (graphic objects).
- Double-click the frame of one of the selected text or picture objects.
- Double-click the gray selection button in the middle of one of the selected text or picture
objects.
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + M (Windows/Linux) or Command + M (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > General.
- Choose the command General in the Context menu with the mouse over the frame or the
gray selection button in the middle of one of the selected text or picture objects, or over
the frame or surface of a selected graphic object .
3. Enter the required co-ordinates in the fields Horizontal Offset and/or Vertical Offset for
closed objects:
- Replace the values in the entry fields to position the objects absolutely.
- Enter a factor (e.g. +10) to move the objects relatively, providing they all have the same
co-ordinates. Positive values move the objects to the right or downwards. Negative val-
ues move the objects to the left or upwards.
4. Click OK to close the dialog

Changing object hierarchy


Objects are assigned to a certain layer in the order in which they are created. This can be shown
by the fact that a newly created object will be drawn on top of the other object. In practice it
will seldom happen as you will create objects in exactly the same sequence you will use them
later.
The commands Send to Front, Send Forward, Send Backward and Send to Back in the Object
menu and in the Context menu for Objects as well as their shortcuts allow you to lay objects
over or under one another in any sequence.

Change object hierarchy:


1. Select one or more objects.
2. Choose one of the following options to bring the selected objects in the hierarchy to the
front:
52
Working with Objects

- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Plus (Windows/Linux) or Command + Plus (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > Send to Front.
- Choose the command Send to Front in the Context menu.
3. Choose one of the following options to send the selected objects in the hierarchy to the back:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Minus (Windows/Linux) or Command + Minus (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > Send to Back.
- Choose the command Send to Back in the Context menu.
4. Choose one of the following options to send the selected objects in the hierarchy one level
forward:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + Plus (Windows/Linux) or Command + Alt + Plus (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > Send Forward.
- Choose the command Send Forward in the Context menu.
5. Choose one of the following options to send the selected objects in the hierarchy one level
backwards:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + Minus (Windows/Linux) or Command + Alt + Minus (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > Send Backward.
- Choose the command Send Backward in the Context menu.

Object alignment
Another option to change the position of objects is through the Alignment command. This is
especially useful if several objects have to be positioned in a certain way relative to another.

Align objects with menu commands:


1. Select at least two objects.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Select the menu command Object > Alignment.
- Select the command Alignment in the Context menu.
3. Choose a corresponding option from the popup menu:
- Choose the command Left Edge to align all selected objects on the left edge of the
selected object whose left edge is furthest to the left.
- Choose the command Center horizontally to center all selected objects on the horizontal
center axis of the object selection.
- Choose the command Right Edge to align all selected objects on the right edge of the
selected object whose right edge is furthest to the right.
- Choose the command Center to align all selected objects on both the horizontal and ver-
tical center axes of the object selection.
53
Working with Objects

- Choose the command Top Edge to align all selected objects on the top edge of the
selected object whose top edge is the furthest up the page.
- Choose the command Center vertically to center all selected objects on the vertical center
axis of the object selection.
- Choose the command Bottom Edge to align all selected objects on the bottom edge of the
selected object whose bottom edge is the furthest down the page.
You can also align Objects with the menu command Align/Distribute. The dialog displays a
preview of how the selected objects will be aligned.

Align objects with the Align/Distribute dialog:


1. Select at least two objects.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Comma (Windows/Linux) or Command + Comma (Mac).
- Select the menu command Object > Alignment > Align/Distribute.
- Select the command Alignment > Align/Distribute in the Context menu.
3. Choose one or more of the following options:
- Choose the option Horizontal and Spacing as well as the option Left Edge in the popup
menu Between to align all selected objects on the left edge of the selected object whose
left edge is furthest to the left.
- Choose the option Horizontal and Spacing as well as the option Center in the popup
menu Between to center all selected objects on the horizontal center axis of the object
selection.
- Choose the option Horizontal and Spacing as well as the option Right Edge in the popup
menu Between to align all selected objects on the right edge of the selected object whose
right edge is furthest to the right.
- Choose the option Vertical and Spacing as well as the option Top Edge in the popup
menu Between to align all selected objects on the top edge of the selected object whose
top edge is the furthest up the page.
- Choose the option Vertical and Spacing as well as the option Center in the popup menu
Between to center all selected objects on the horizontal center axis of the object selec-
tion.
- Choose the option Vertical and Spacing as well as the option Bottom Edge in the popup
menu Between to align all selected objects on the bottom edge of the selected object
whose bottom edge is the furthest up the page.
4. Click OK to close the dialog.
Several objects selected together may also be aligned using the Object palette or the Object
Settings.

54
Working with Objects

Align objects with the Module palette:


1. Select at least two objects.
2. Enter appropriate values in the Module Palette:
- Enter a value in the entry field X to align the selected objects horizontally. If a left reference
point is selected in the Module Palette, the objects will be aligned left on this point. If a
right reference point is selected, objects will be aligned right on this point. If a center
point is selected in the Module Palette, the objects will be centered horizontally on this
point.
- Enter a value in the entry field Y to align the selected objects vertically. If a top reference
point is selected in the Module Palette, the objects will be top aligned on this point. If a
bottom reference point is selected, objects will be bottom aligned on this point. If a center
point is selected in the Module Palette, the objects will be centered vertically on this point.

Align objects with the Object Settings dialog:


1. Select at least two objects.
2. Choose one of the following options:
Double-click the selected objects and at the same time hold down the Ctrl key (Windows/Linux)
or the Command key (Mac), when among the selected objects is a text object or a picture
object.
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + M (Windows/Linux) or Command + M (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > General
- Choose the command General in the Context menu. Hold down the Ctrl key (Windows/
Linux) or the Command key (Mac), when among the selected objects is a text object or a
picture object.
3. Select one or more of the following options:
- Enter a value in the entry field Horizontal Offset to align the selected objects horizontally.
- Enter a value in the entry field Vertical Offset to align the selected objects vertically.
4. Click OK to close the dialog.

Rotate and Mirror


The commands Rotate and Mirror allow modification of objects and their position.
Rotate and Mirror are two related commands. While a rotation is only specified through its
rotation angle, the mirroring function will additionally also set the Mirror property. For this
reason the two functions will be explained here together. As in the case of the positioning of
objects the application differentiates between interactive versus precise and absolute versus
relative rotation and mirroring.
Through the Rotate tool and the Mirror tool in the Toolbar objects can be rotated and mirrored
interactively.

55
Working with Objects

To rotate or mirror an object in a precise way the application allows you to enter precise values
in the Object Settings dialog box or the Object palette.

Rotate or mirror an object Interactively:


1. Select an object.
2. Choose a tool from the Toolbar:
- Select the Rotate tool. The Rotate pointer will appear.
- Select the Mirror tool. The Mirror pointer will appear.
3. Do one of the following:
- Click the Rotate pointer near the object, hold down the mouse button, and move the
mouse along the preferred rotation angle. The point at which you click is the rotation
point, so it is advisable to click as near as possible to one of the object selection points.
The application will show you the original and current angle of rotation interactively. By
lengthening the rotation axis you will get a more precise preview. Release the mouse
button to confirm the setting. The Rotation Angle will be displaced in the Module palette
with an accuracy of three decimal places.
- Click the Mirror pointer near the horizontal object axis (top, middle or bottom) on which
the mirroring should take place. The object is mirrored horizontally, which means that
the top is now the bottom. For a “vertical” mirroring, you now need to rotate the object
by 180 degrees.
Please note that if you apply the Mirror tool again, the mirroring of the object will be
undone. If you wish to change the rotation angle interactively with the help of the mouse but
still wish to retain the mirroring, the Rotate tool must be used.
Rotate/Mirror object precisely with Object Settings:
1. Select an object.
2. Select one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + M (Windows/Linux) or Command + M (Mac).
- Select the menu command Object > General.
- Select the command Object > General in the Context menu.
3. In the Rotation Angle entry field enter a value between + 360 or - 360 degrees to rotate the
object.
4. Select the Mirrored option if the object is to be mirrored along its horizontal axis.
- If you want the object to be mirrored and rotated at the same time select the Mirrored
option and enter a Rotation Angle.
5. Click OK to close the dialog.

Rotate and mirror objects precisely with the palette:


1. Select an object.

56 2. Set the Reference Point of the object to Center.


Working with Objects

3. Click the Rotate entry field in the Object palette and enter a value in the range between -
360 and + 360 degrees.
4. Click the checkbox Mirrored to mirror the object horizontally.
5. Confirm by pressing the Tab, Return or Enter key.
Through the commands described an absolute rotation angle has been set for an object.

Skew objects
Another option to modify the position of an object is through the Skew Angle setting. Either a
positive or negative angle may be entered in this entry field. Modification of the Skew Angle
will transform the object. This can be applied to all closed objects.
If the Skew Angle is specified for text or picture objects the content of these objects will also be
transformed. Please note that there are additional options for skewing text passages and
images, which will be described in the appropriate chapters and which take a cumulative
effect.

Skew Object with Module Palette:


1. Select an object.
2. Enter a value in the Skew Angle data entry field. Values between +1 and +75 give a skew to
the left, values between -1 and -75 give a skew to the right.
- You can click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the angle by one degree at a
time. Hold down the mouse button to scroll through the settings.

Skew Object with Object Settings dialog:


1. Select an object.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Double-click the selected object.
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + M (Windows/Linux) or Command + M (Mac).
- Select the menu command Object > General.
- Select the command General in the Context menu.
3. Enter a value in the Skew Angle data entry field. Values between +1 and +75 give a skew to
the left, values between -1 and -75 give a skew to the right.
4. Click OK to close the dialog.
As well as original objects, Alias objects may also be rotated and skewed.

57
Working with Objects

Basic commands
Delete objects
Selected objects can deleted by using the Delete command.

Delete objects:
1. Select one or more objects.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the Del key.
- Press the Backspace key.
- Choose the menu command Edit > Delete.
Tip:
If an original object is deleted that possesses Alias Objects that are not selected, a warning
will appear that allows the user to cancel his command. Please refer to the section Working
with Alias Objects.
Reference:
Section Pasting objects
Section Undo
Section Working with Alias Objects

Cut objects
Cutting objects is similar in its function to deleting objects. Objects which are cut disappear,
but they are copied to the clipboard and reappear again with the command Paste.

Cut objects:
1. Select one or several objects.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + X (Windows/Linux) or Command + X (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Edit > Cut.
- Choose the command Cut in the Context menu.
Tip:
When an object which has connected Alias objects is cut, a dialog will prompt you to confirm
or cancel the operation. Please refer to the section Working with Alias Objects.
Reference:
Pasting Objects
Working with Alias Objects

Copy objects
When you need the same object more than once you can create a copy of one or more existing
objects. The selected objects are copied to the clipboard, and can be pasted back in the document
58 with the command Paste.
Working with Objects

Copy objects:
1. Select one or more objects.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + C (Windows/Linux) or Command + C (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Edit > Copy.
- Choose the command Copy in the Context menu.
Tip:
When the original object should be copied that has unselected Alias objects a warning dialog
will appear prompting the user to reverse his decision. Please see the section Working with
Alias objects for further details.
Reference:
Section Pasting Objects
Section Duplicating Objects
Section Working with Alias Objects

Pasting Objects
When you have cut or copied objects to the clipboard these can be pasted through the Paste
command.

Paste objects:
1. Select the document page on which the cut or copied objects are to be pasted.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + V (Windows/Linux) or Command + V (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Edit > Paste.
- Choose the command Paste in the Context menu.
Tip:
- The paste offset can be specified in the Preferences dialog (Pages & Objects Tab) through
the menu command Edit > Preferences.
- When the objects have connected Alias objects these will automatically also be pasted. If
there are insufficient pages available in the document to paste the Alias objects to they
will only be pasted to the pages which are available in the document.
Reference:
Section Working with Alias Objects
Section Preferences

Duplicate objects
The Duplicate command is similar to the Copy command. The main difference is that the Copy
command makes only one copy of the object, which can be pasted into the document with a
predefined offset. The Duplicate command allows you to make multiple copies of objects.
Objects can also be copied automatically to following pages with this command.

59
Working with Objects

Duplicate objects:
1. Select one or several objects.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + D (Windows/Linux) or Command + D (Mac).
- Select the menu command Object > Duplicate.
3. Enter a value in the field Duplications in the Number section.
4. Enter in the fields Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset the offset that should be applied to
each duplicate. If you enter the value 0 in both cases, all duplicates will be placed on top of
each other.
5. Define the object type:
- Choose the option Copy, if independent duplicates are to be created.
- Choose the option Alias, if dependent duplicates are to be created.
6. Define the page:
- Choose the option Current Page, if the duplicates should be placed on the current page.
- Choose Duplicate on Following Page(s), if the duplicates are to be placed on following
pages, whereby you can choose one of the options Left Pages, Right Pages or Left and
Right Pages. In this case one duplicate will be placed on each following page.
7. Select the option Link to Text Chain when the original object is a text object and you want
the text to flow into the duplicate objects.
8. Click OK to close the dialog.

Split objects
Another elegant option to create new objects is through the Split command. All object types
can be split, whether they are Graphic, Picture or Text objects. However the following objects
can not be split : objects which are part of a text chain, locked or protected objects, Alias
objects and original objects with connected Alias objects.

Split objects:
1. Select one or more objects.
2. Select one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + Shift + T (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + Shift
+ T (Mac).
- Select the menu command Object > Split.
3. Enter the number of sections in the fields Horizontal and/or Vertical. As an option, you can also
enter a horzontal and/or a vertical offset in the fields on the right hand side of the dialog.
4. Define the object type in the Create section:
- Select the option Copy, if independent duplicates are to be created.
60
Working with Objects

- Select the option Alias, if dependent duplicates are to be created. In this case the original
object will be located in the top left corner. All other objects are Alias objects derived
from it.
5. Select the option Link to Text Chain when the original object is a text object and the new
objects are to be part of the text chain.
6. Click OK to close the dialog.

Lock objects
With the command Lock you prevent the interactive repositioning and resizing of objects (by
mistake).
If the mouse pointer is moved over the frame of a locked object the lock pointer will be dis-
played. The lock pointer for objects, consisting of a lock and an object pointer, shows that the
object concerned is locked and therefore cannot be moved.

Lock objects:
1. Select one or more objects.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Shift + L (Windows/Linux) or Command + Shift + L (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > Lock.

Unlock objects:
1. Select one or more locked objects.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + Shift + L (Windows/Linux) or Command- Option + Shift + L
(Mac).
- Select the menu command Object > Unlock.
TIP:
As well as original objects, it is also possible to lock Alias objects. Please note, however, that
the locking of Alias objects is under certain circumstances only of a temporary nature. This is
the case when the original object is resized - the Alias object will change accordingly. In this
case the locked Alias objects must be unlocked automatically, because the connection
between original and Alias Objects is absolute.
Reference:
Section Paste objects
Section Duplicate Objects
Section Working with Alias Objects

61
Working with Objects

Protect objects
With the command Protection you prevent the content of certain objects from being altered.
If the mouse pointer is moved over a protected object, the lock pointer will be displayed. The
lock pointer for text objects consists of a lock and an I-beam pointer. The lock pointer for picture
objects consists of a lock and a grabber pointer. Both show that the content of the object is
protected and can therefore not be edited.

Protect objects:
1. Select one or more objects.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Shift + H (Windows/Linux) or Command -Shift + H (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > Protection.

Cancel protection:
1. Select one or more protected objects.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Shift + H (Windows/Linux) or Command-Shift + H (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > Cancel Protection.

Modifying object properties


Resizing objects interactively
The program provides many options to define the size and form of objects interactively or with
the help of palettes and dialogs.
When an object is selected, its selection handles will appear as described in the section Selecting
Objects. The selection handles show that the object may be modified. The selection handles are
displayed in the selection color and are not printed.
Selection handles are either sizing handles or control handles. Rectangles, ovals, polygons,
lines and orthogonal lines all have sizing handles that are displayed as a rectangle. Bézier
curves and closed Bézier objects also have control handles, which are displayed as points. A
sizing handle may have one or two tangents at whose end points control handles are displayed.
To resize an object, position the mouse pointer exactly on one of the sizing handles. The mouse
pointer will be positioned exactly on a sizing handle when the sizing pointer is displayed. If
you now hold down the mouse button and drag the mouse in the required direction, the object
will be resized.
During the resizing operation, you will see the same imaginary frame or the same imaginary
line that you already know from the creation of a new object.

62
Working with Objects

Resize/scale rectangle and oval interactively:


1. Create a rectangle or an oval.
2. Change the size and form of thje rectangle or oval using the eight sizing handles:
- Position the mouse pointer on one of the four middle sizing handles if you only want to
resize the object’s height or width.
- Position the mouse pointer on one of the four sizing handles at the object corners if you
want to resize the object‘s height and width simultaneously.
3. Hold down the mouse button.
4. Keeping the mouse button held down, move the mouse in any direction.
- Hold down the Shift key as well if you want to resize the object proportionally.
- Hold down the Ctrl key as well as the Shift key if you have selected a corner sizing handle
and also want to resize the image content proportionally with the picture object.
- Hold down just the Ctrl key if you have selected a corner sizing handle and also want to
resize the image content unproportionally with the picture object.
5. Release the mouse button when the object has the desired form and size.

Resize polygons and lines interactively:


1. Create a polygon, a line, an orthogonal line or a multiple line.
2. Position the mouse pointer on a sizing handle and hold down the mouse button.
3. Keeping the mouse button held down, move the mouse in any direction.
- When resizing a polygon or a multiple line, hold down the Shift key if a line segment
should be displayed as an orthogonal line.
- When resizing a line, hold down the Shift key if the line should be displayed as an
orthogonal line.
- When resizing an orthogonal line, hold down the Shift key if the orthogonal line should
be displayed as a line with any angle.
4. Release the mouse button when the object has the desired form and size.

Resize curves and Bézier objects:


1. Create a curve, an orthogonal line or a multiple line.
2. Position the mouse pointer on a sizing handle if the curve is to be resized symmetrically and
hold down the mouse button.
3. Position the mouse pointer on a control handle if the curve is to be resized asymmetrically
and hold down the mouse button:
- Keeping the mouse button held down, move the mouse in any direction to lengthen the
tangent.
- When resizing the curve, hold down the Ctrl key as well if you want to keep both tangents
63 the same size.
Working with Objects

- Keeping the mouse button held down, move the mouse in any direction and hold down
the Shift and Ctrl keys as well to break the tangent.
4. Release the mouse button when the object has the desired form and size.

Delete sizing handles


With multiple lines, polygons, open and closed curves the application allows you to delete one
of the object‘s selection handles. Move the mouse pointer over the sizing handle or control
handle which is to be deleted.
The sizing pointer will now appear. If you now press the Alt + Shift (Windows/Linux) or the
Option + Shift shortcut keys (Mac), the sizing pointer will be displayed with a minus sign. Now
you can delete the point by clicking the mouse button. When a sizing handle is deleted, its
control handles will automatically be deleted with it.

Delete sizing and control handles:


1. Position the mouse on a sizing handle or control handle, hold down the Alt + Shift (Win-
dows/Linux) or Option + Shift shortcut keys (Mac).
2. When the sizing pointer with the minus sign appears, click the mouse button.

Create a half-circle:
1. Create a circular object.
2. Select the menu command Object > Form > Convert to Polygon.
3. Delete the central sizing handle from the bottom edge of the object by holding down the Alt +
Shift (Windows/Linux) or Option + Shift shortcut keys (Mac) and clicking the mouse button.
4. Delete the bottom two control handles from the left and right sides of the object holding
down the Alt + Shift (Windows/Linux) or Option + Shift shortcut keys (Mac) and clicking the
mouse button, so that the bottom sizing points of the object left and right only possess one
tangent.

Add sizing handles


As well as the deleting of both sizing handles and control handles, the application also allows
you to add sizing handles. The new sizing handle will appear on top of the original sizing han-
dle you were modifying and will still have to be positioned.

Add a sizing handle:


1. Select a polygon object.
2. Position the mouse pointer on one of the sizing handles. The sizing pointer will now appear.
3. Hold down the Alt key (Windows/Linux) or the Option key (Mac). The sizing pointer will be
displayed with a plus sign. Now click with the mouse to create the new handle.
4. Release the Alt key (Windows/Linux) or the Option key (Mac), but hold down the mouse but-
ton again and move the sizing pointer in any direction to position the new sizing handle.
64 5. Release the mouse button once you have achieved the desired shape.
Working with Objects

Automatic Scaling
As you have already learned in the section Sizing objects interactively, the image content of
rectangles and ovals may also be scaled interactively with the object.
In practice it often occurs that not just one object but a whole group of objects should be dis-
played in a smaller or larger form. For example, when you need to scale down a page from A4
paper size to A5 paper size you would normally have to change all the objects interactively or
numerically with the help of the object measurement settings. This would only change the
frame size but not the content of the frame, which you would have to scale down separately.
To solve this problem quickly and elegantly the application offers you the Scaling command in
the Object menu.

Scale objects and groups proportionally with the dialog:


1. Select a single object or a group of objects. Please refer to the section Working with groups
to see how to create a group.
2. Choose the menu command Object > Scaling.
3. In the section New Size, define the scaling or the new size of the object or group:
- Enter a value between 1% and 1000% in the Scaling field to make a relative scaling. While
with the entry 100% nothing will change in the object measurements, the entry 120% will
mean that the object is enlarged by a factor of 1.20. The value 50% will reduce the object
to half its original size. After the scale factor is entered, the new width and height set-
tings will be computed automatically.
- Alternatively, enter values in the Width and Height entry fields to give an absolute scal-
ing. Since the Scaling command only scales objects and object groups proportionally,
the values in the field Width change whenever the values in the Height field are changed.
This is also true the other way around.
4. Define in the section Scaling Attributes whether and which object and content attributes
should be scaled:
- Select the option Line Width if the line or frame width should be scaled proportionally.
- Choose the option Picture Attributes, if the scaling of the image content and its position-
ing in the object should be scaled proportionally.
- Choose the option Text Attributes, if text attributes such as font size, text indents or line
spacing should be scaled proportionally.
- Choose the option Text Object Indent if the special indent settings of the text object
should be scaled proportionally.
- Choose the option Column Gutter if the gutter in a text object with several columns
should be scaled proportionally.
5. Click OK to close the dialog.

65
Working with Objects

Summary Resizing objects


- Sizing handles control object size.
- Control handles control the curvature of a line.
- Sizing handles and control handles can be moved in any direction.
- The two control handles of a sizing handle can be at different distances from it.
- The slope control of one tangent line can be split into two tangent lines by holding down
the Ctrl + Shift (Windows/Linux) or the Command + Shift shortcut keys (Mac).
- Sizing handles and control handles can be deleted by holding down the Alt + Shift (Win-
dows/Linux) or Option + Shift shortcut keys (Mac), and clicking the points to be deleted.
- The deletion of a sizing handle will automatically delete its control handles.
- Sizing handles can be added by pressing the Alt key (Windows/Linux) or Option key (Mac)
and clicking the mouse with the sizing pointer over an existing sizing handle.
- Multiple objects can be resized proportionally using the command Scale.
- Object scaling can be relative or absolute.
- As well as the object size, its content can be scaled.

Object fill
Fill Color, Density, Transparency
The following properties may be changed either through the Module palette or with the set-
tings in the Object Settings dialog. With new documents the program provides a set of stan-
dard colors. To learn how to create new colors and blends, to edit and delete them, please refer
to the section Working with Colors.

Change fill color with the Module palette:


1. Create or select a closed object.
2. Select a color or blend from the popup menu Color in the Fill section in the Module Palette.
3. Define the color shade in the Shade field:
- Enter a value between 0% and 100%, or select an entry from the popup menu to define
the fill color shade.
- Enter the value -1 or Transparent, or select the entry Transparent from the popup menu
to switch off the fill color.
4. Define the opacity/transparency of the fill color in the Opacity field:
- Enter a value between 0% and 100%, or select an entry from the popup menu.
5. Enter a value in the field Color Blend Angle if the fill color is a blend.

66
Working with Objects

Change fill color with the Object Settings:


1. Create or select a closed object.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + M (Windows/Linux) or Command + M (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > General.
- Select the command General in the Context menu.
- Double-click the selected object.
3. Choose a color or blend from the popup menu Color in the Fill Color section.
4. In the Shade field of the Fill Color section, define the density or transparency of the color:
- Enter a value between 0% and 100%, or select an entry from the popup menu to define
the fill color shade.
- Enter the value -1 or Transparent, or select the entry Transparent from the popup menu
to switch off the fill color.
5. Enter a value in the field Color Blend Angle if the fill color is a blend.
6. Define the opacity/transparency of the Fill Color in the Opacity field:
- Enter a value between 0% and 100%, or select an entry from the popup menu.
7. Click OK to close the dialog.

Lines and Frames


Line Color, Shade, Transparency
With new documents the program provides a set of standard colors. To learn how to create new
colors and blends, to edit and delete them, please refer to the section Working with Colors.

Change Line color with the Module palette:


1. Create or select an object.
2. Choose a color from the popup menu Line Color in the Line/Frame section in the Module Palette.
3. Define the line color shade in the Line Shade field:
- Enter a value between 0% and 100%, or select an entry from the popup menu to define
the color shade.
- Enter the value -1 or Transparent, or select the entry Transparent from the popup menu
to switch off the line or frame color.
4. Define the opacity/transparency of the frame or line in the field Opacity (Line/Frame) in the
Line/Frame section in the Module Palette:
- Enter a value between 0% and 100%, or select an entry from the popup menu.
67
Working with Objects

Change Line Color with the Object Settings:


1. Create or select an object.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + M (Windows/Linux) or Command + M (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > General.
- Select the command General in the Context menu.
- Double-click the selected object.
3. Select a color from the popup menu Color in the Frame section.
4. In the Shade field of the Frame section, define the density or transparency of the color:
- Enter a value between 0% and 100%, or select an entry from the popup menu to define
the line/frame color shade.
- Enter the value -1, or select the entry Transparent from the popup menu to switch off the
line/frame color.
5. Define the opacity/transparency of the Frame in the Opacity section:
- Enter a value between 0% and 100%, or select an entry from the popup menu. This entry
is valid for lines and frames.
6. Click OK to close the dialog.

Change Line/Frame Width


The line width of a line object or object frame can be modified through the Object palette or the
Object Settings. When using the line width there are several aspects to be noted:
- Because object coordinates are absolute the line widths of closed objects will always be
drawn on the inside of an object. With line objects the line width will be equally applied to
both sides of the object.
- When a graphic object is converted to a text object the line width is automatically set to 0.
- When a line width is applied to a text object, the text in this object will have the same size
as the line width setting.
- When a line width is applied to criss-cross polygons, this can for mathematical reasons
lead to incorrect results.

Change Line Width with the Module palette:


1. Create or select several objects.
2. Choose one of the following options to define the line or frame width:
- Enter a value in the Line Width field of the Module Palette.
- Choose an entry from the popup menu.

68
Working with Objects

Change Line width with the Object Settings:


1. Create or select several objects.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + M (Windows/Linux) or Command + M (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > General.
- Select the command General in the Context menu.
- Double-click the selected object.
3. Choose one of the following options to define the line or frame width:
- Enter a value in the Width field of the Frame section.
- Select an entry from the popup menu.
4. Click OK to close the dialog.

Change Frame type


A frame type can be defined in the Module palette (in Object Mode) or with the Object Settings.
When using line types there are several aspects to be noted:
- When applying frame types, the program always applies the frame in relation to the line
width, so that the frame always meets at closed object corners and that line objects always
have neat ends.
- The spaces between line segments remain transparent, irrelevant of which color and shade
has been selected for the frame.

Change Line Style with the Module palette:


1. Create or select an object.
2. Choose an entry from the popup menu Line Style in the Module Palette.

Change Line type with the Object Settings:


1. Create or select an object.
2. Select one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + M (Windows/Linux) or Command + M (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > General.
- Choose the context menu command General.
- Double-click the selected object.
3. Choose an entry from the popup menu Line Style in the Frame section.
4. Click OK to close the dialog.

69
Working with Objects

Change Line ends


The line ends of a line object can be modified through the Module palette (in Object Mode) or
the Object Settings. When using the line ends there are several aspects to be noted:
- When applying line ends you should be aware that the program always applies the end
form in relation to the line width.
- It is also important to note that lines with differing ends may be printed differently,
although they posses the same co-ordinates.

Change Line ends with the Module palette:


1. Create or select a line.
2. Select an entry from the popup menu Line Start and/or Line End in the Module Palette for
one or both ends of the line.

Change Line ends with the Object Settings:


1. Create or select a line.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + M (Windows/Linux) or Command + M (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > General.
- Choose thecommand General in the Context menu .
- Double-click the selected object.
- Select an entry from the popup menus Line Ends in the Frame section for one or both
ends of the line.
3. Click OK to close the dialog.

Change Radius
The corner radius of a rectangular object can be modified through the Module palette (in
Object Mode) or the Object Settings. When using the radius there are several aspects to be
noted:
- The radius is only applied to rectangles or squares. It has no effect on other objects.
- When a radius is applied to text objects the text at the object corners is automatically
indented according to these settings.

Change radius with the Module palette:


1. Create or select a rectangle or square.
2. Choose one of the following options to define the radius:
- Enter a value in the Radius field of the Module palette.
- Choose an entry from the popup menu Radius.

70
Working with Objects

Change radius with the Object Settings:


1. Create or select a rectangle or square.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + M (Windows/Linux) or Command + M (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > General.
- Choose the command General in the Context menu.
- Double-click the selected object.
3. Choose one of the following options to define the radius:
- Enter a value in the Radius field in the Frame section of the dialog.
- Select an entry from the popup menu Radius.
4. Click OK to close the dialog.

Using Guide Objects


Guide objects are objects which have “magnetic” properties. Guide objects will “attract” other
objects during creation, moving and resizing in a magnet-like way. Guide objects simplify the
positioning of objects in your document since they will automatically align objects for you with
their magnetic characteristics.
Any object regardless of the form and type can be a Guide object which “attracts” other
objects. Therefore all Guide objects may be assigned the same commands as objects that are
not Guide objects. Among these are the exact positioning as well as the changing of the dis-
play.
Guide objects can be created automatically and manually, and shown or hidden with a key-
stroke.
There are seven ways to specify Guide object settings :
- The option Guide Object in the Object Settings dialog in the menu Object > General.
- The option Guide Object in the Object section in the Object palette.
- The option Guide Objects Magnetic in the View menu.
- The Snap to Distance option in the Preferences dialog (Tab Pages & Objects).
- The menu command View > Guide Objects selectable.
- The menu command View > Show/Hide Guide Objects.
- The option Grid: Behind/Front in the Preferences dialog (Tab Program > General, Options
section).
Reference:
Align Objects
Document Setup (Grid)

71
Working with Objects

Create Guide Objects automatically


The program offers two options to create Guide objects automatically:
1. The automatic creation of Guide objects with the Grid option in the Document Setup dialog.
2. The creation of Guide objects with the Ruler.
- In the first case the program creates horizontal and vertical Guide objects on the first Alias
page.
- In the second case the user creates Guide objects interactively by dragging lines from the
Ruler.

Create Guide object with Ruler:


1. Ensure that the Ruler is shown. If this is not the case,
- press the shortcut keys Ctrl + R (Windows/Linux) or Command + R (Mac).
- choose the menu command View > Show Ruler.
2. Ensure that the Guide objects are visible. If this is not the case,
- press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + G (Windows/Linux) or Command-Option + G (Mac).
- choose the menu command View > Show Guide Objects.
3. Ensure that the Guide objects are selectable so that you can position your Guide objects
later. If this is not the case,
- press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + Shift + G (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + Shift
+ G (Mac).
- choose the menu command View > Guide Objects Selectable.
4. Position the mouse pointer in the horizontal or vertical ruler to create a horizontal or vertical
line with the Guide object property.
5. Hold down the mouse button and drag a line onto the document page. An imaginary line
will be shown.
6. Release the mouse button at the position of your choice.
The object stays selected and it can be positioned exactly with the Object palette or the Object
Settings.
If you now select the Object Settings dialog, you will see that the Guide object option is acti-
vated. At the same time the program assumes that you need the automatically created Guide
objects to position other objects. therefore the option Print is de-activated, but you can change
this at any time. further, the object is automatically assigned the default color [Guide Objects].
The color [Guide Objects] is predefined in the program as fluorescent green, but may be
changed at any time. For further information on this subject please refer to the chapter Work-
ing with Colors.

72
Working with Objects

Create Guide Objects manually


Any object regardless of the form and type can be a Guide object which “attracts” other objects
magnetically.

Create Guide object manually:


1. Ensure that the Guide objects are visible. If this is not the case,
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + G (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + G (Mac).
- Choose the menu command View > Show Guide Objects.
2. Select one or more objects.
3. Choose one of the following options:
- Open the Object Settings and choose the option Guide Object.
- Choose the option Guide Object in the Object section of the Module palette.
4. If the Guide object is not to be output, as with the automatically created Guide objects, .
deactivate the option Print, in the Object Settings or Printable in the Object section of the
Module palette.

Select Guide Objects


Guide objects generally serve as position guides for other objects. This is particularly true of
those Guide objects that are created automatically with the Ruler and are not printed. So that
Guide objects are not selected by mistake, their selectability may be switched on or off for the
whole document.

Guide Objects Selectable On/Off:


Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + Shift + G (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + Shift
+ G (Mac).
- Select the menu command View > Guide Objects Selectable.
If in front of the command a tick or checkmark is shown, Guide objects are selectable. If no
checkmark is shown they are not selectable. The command is similar to the commands Lock and
Protection in practice, but is much quicker to use.

Show Guide objects


The Grid of Guide objects created through the Document Setup dialog is helpful for exact posi-
tioning. The grid lines themselves are not part of the document layout. In fact in practice most
Guide objects displayed as lines are only useful in positioning.
In order to view the layout of your document you may want to hide all Guide objects which are
not really a part of the basic layout.

73
Working with Objects

Hide/Show Guide objects:


Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + G (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + G (Mac).
- Select the menu command View > Show Guide Objects.
Note:
Please note that Guide objects still possess their “magnetic” properties also when they are
hidden. Guide objects which are hidden can not be selected.
You are also able to make use of the fact that you are able to show and hide Guide objects in
the following situation. When you need to focus on something specific while using a large
magnification factor you can temporarily hide objects by first assigning them the guided
object status and then hide them. When you have finished you can zoom out to original size
and disable the guided object and hide status.

Magnetism
If objects are moved or resized in the direction of a Guide Object they will automatically snap
to that Guide Object like a magnet. Whether and at which distance Objects are attracted
depends on the magnetism being activated and the setting for the Snap to distance.
Guide objects are magnetic as default. In the creation of a document it may make sense to dis-
able the magnetism for all Guide objects.

Guide Objects Magnetic On/Off:


Select the menu command View > Guide Objects Magnetic.
If a tick or checkmark appears in front of this command, Guide objects are magnetic. Otherwise
they are not magnetic.
The distance from which an object is attracted magnetically depends on the Snap to distance.
The value for the Snap to distance is entered in screen pixels and as a default is entered as 10
pixels. This value is independent of the scaling factor in which the document is displayed.
This means that Guide objects will apply their magnetic attraction already at quite a small dis-
tance when the zoom factor is below 100%. By contrast, Guide objects attract other objects at a
relatively great distance when for example the zoom factor is above 200%. The standard value
for the Snap to distance may be changed at any time.

Change Snap to Distance for Guide objects:


1. Choose the menu command Edit > Preferences (Windows/Linux) or VivaDesigner > Preferences
(Mac).
2. Choose the Tab Pages & Objects.
3. Enter the value 20 in the field Snap to Distance. This means that magnetic objects will
already attract other objects when they are resized or moved and the distance between the
objects is less than 21 screen pixels.

74
Working with Objects

Summary Using Guide Objects


- Any object, regardless of its type or form, can be a Guide object.
- Guide objects can be created with the option Guide Object in the Object Settings dialog.
- Guide objects can be created as Guides by dragging them from the Ruler.
- Guide objects can be created automatically through the Grid option in the Document Setup
dialog in the menu File > Document Setup.
- Guide objects created through the Ruler or through the Grid option in the Document Setup
dialog are by default non-printable. This can however be modified by the user at any
time.
- Guide objects will be drawn like normal objects in front of other objects if the Grid option
in the Program Preferences dialog opened with the menu command Edit > Preferences
(Windows/Linux) or VivaDesigner > Preferences (Mac) was not changed to Behind.
- Any change in the hierarchy of Guide objects using the option Behind in the Preferences >
Program dialog will only be applied to newly created Guide objects and not to existing
ones.
- The “magnetic” snap property of Guide objects can be enabled and disabled with the
menu command View > Guide Objects Magnetic.
- The Snap to Distance setting specifies the screen pixel range in which the Guide object will
“attract” objects.
- The Snap to Distance setting is defined in the Objects tab in the Preferences > Pages & Objects
dialog, menu command Edit > Preferences (Windows/Linux) or VivaDesigner > Preferences
(Mac). This setting is independent of the magnification factor chosen.
- Guide objects can either be selectable or non-selectable. This can be specified with the
menu command View > Guide Objects selectable. The shortcut keys for this command are
Ctrl + Alt + Shift + G (Windows/Linux) or Command + Alt + Shift + G (Mac).
- Guide objects can be hidden or shown with the menu command View > Show Guide Objects.
The shortcut keys for this command are Ctrl + Alt + G (Windows/Linux) or Command +
Option + G (Mac).

75
Working with Objects

Working with Alias Objects


Creating Alias objects
In the section Create objects, we noted that is a difference between original and Alias objects.
Since an Alias object is a copy of an original object, there is no Alias without an original. To
create an Alias object, select an object on your document page and choose the menu command
Object > Alias > Create Alias or use the appropriate shortcut keys. The object you select may be
an Alias object itself, which saves you time trying to find the original object, which could well
be on another page.

Create an Alias object:


1. Choose one of the following options:
- Create a new object of any type.
- Select an existing object.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + x (multiplication) or Ctrl + Shift + * (Windows/Linux) or
Command + * (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > Alias > Create Alias.
An Alias object will now appear below and to the right of the original object. The original
object will be deselected and the newly created Alias object will be selected. The settings for
the horizontal and vertical offset from the original object are defined in the Pages & Objects
section of the Preferences and are the same as those used for pasting objects.
3. Now select the original object and make some changes to it, such as fill or frame color/
shade/opacity. The Alias object you have created takee over the changes automatically.
Another way to create Alias objects is to use the options with the Duplicate and New Document
Page(s) commands. These commands not only allow you to create Alias objects on the same
page but also on other pages.

Duplicate objects as Alias objects onto following pages:


1. Create a document with two or more pages.
2. Create an object of your choice on the first page of the document.
3. Duplicate the object using the command Duplicate as described in the section Duplicate
objects:
- Choose the number of duplicates according to the number of follwing pages in the docu-
ment, i.e. if your document has two pages, create only one duplicate.
- Choose the Alias option.
- Choose Duplicate on Following Page(s) and Left and Right Pages. One duplicate will be
placed on each following page.
4. Click OK to confirm your definition.
76
Working with Objects

Duplicate objects as Alias objects by inserting pages:


1. Create a document with one page.
2. Create an object of your choice on the (first) page of the document.
3. Add one or more document pages to the document:
- Choose the command Document > Create Pages > New Document Page(s).
- Click the page in the Page palette and select the command New Document Page(s) in the
Context menu.
4. Click the checkbox Take over Objects at the top right of the dialog.
5. Choose the option Take over as an Alias:
- Choose the default option All Objects on Page if you want to create Alias objects of all the
objects on the first page.
- If you have several objects on the first page and only want to create Alias objects from
one object, select this object first and then in the dialog choose the option All Selected
Objects.
6. Click OK to confirm your definition.
A further method of creating Alias objects is to split a single object into identical sections using
the command Object > Split as described in the section Split objects.
In this chapter you have already been introduced to the features and behavior of objects. Many
commands can be applied to both original and Alias objects. There are also commands which
are exclusively applied to Alias objects and their connection with original objects. Through
these commands you are able to accomplish very complicated tasks.

Find Original
The original object has to be selected before any modification can take place. When there are
many Alias objects on different pages in a document, finding the original object may be hard.
This is where the Find Original command comes in.

Find Original:
1. Create a document with at least two pages.
2. Create an object of your choice.
3. Use the Duplicate command to create an Alias object on the following page(s).
4. Go to the following page. Select the Alias object and choose the command Object > Alias >
Find Original.
The program jumps to the original object and selects it automatically.
Obviously this function works just as well if all your objects are on one page, overlay one
another, and so on.

77
Working with Objects

Change Alias into a Copy


When using many objects you may feel the need to modify the content or appearance of an
Alias object directly, which can normally only be done through modifying the original object.
This can be done by converting the Alias to a copy of the original object, and then modifying
it. After the object is converted from an Alias to a copy it is not connected any more to the
original object, so it will not inherit any changes to the original object.

Change Alias into a Copy:


1. Create an object of your choice, and then create an Alias Object from it as described above.
2. Select the Alias object.
3. Choose the command Object > Alias > Change into a Copy. The appearance of the sizing
handles will change to show you that the object is now an original and can be modified
accordingly.

Flexible Alias Content


In the previous section the link between the original object and the Alias object was deleted by
changing the Alias into a copy of the object so as to be able to modify the content or the
appearance of this copy. When only the object content has to be modified and not the graphic
properties such as frame, fill, shade etc. there is an alternative to the Change into a Copy
command.
Especially for this purpose the program allows you to define that the original text or picture
object has a flexible content. If you then create an Alias of this object, the Alias object will still
inherit the graphic properties from the original object but unlike standard Alias objects it will
allow you to modify its content.

Create a Flexible Alias Text and/or Picture Object:


1. Create a text object and/or a picture object.
2. Choose one of the following options to open the Special Settings Object dialog:
- Press the shortcut keys or Ctrl + Alt + M (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + M (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > Special.
- Choose the command Special from the Context menu.
3. Click the checkbox Individual Alias Content and confirm with OK.
4. Create an Alias Object from each of the objects as previously described.
5. Check the success of your command by typing some text into the original OR the Alias text
object or by importing an image into the original OR the Alias picture object. If you now
change the graphic attributes of the original objects, these changes will still be taken over in
their respective Alias objects.
The same principle applies if you want to use the commands Duplicate or Split to create your
objects.

78
Working with Objects

Cancel the flexible content of an Alias Object:


1. Select an original object that has a Flexible Alias Object.
2. Choose one of the following options to open the Special Settings Object dialog:
- Press the shortcut keys or Ctrl + Alt + M (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + M (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > Special.
- Choose the command Special from the Context menu.
3. Click the checkbox Individual Alias Content off.
4. Click OK to confirm your command.
You will now see that the Alias Object has taken over the properties of the original and that its
content cannot be changed. You can change the setting back to individual content again at
any time, and then make content changes in the Alias object.

Summary Alias Objects


- Alias objects are virtual copies of their originals. All attributes including content (for text
and picture objects) are taken over in the Alias Objects.
- Alias Objects of Text or Picture Objects may have an individual content if the original
object has the option Individual Alias Content activated in the Special Settings dialog.
- Alias objects may be created
- manually using shortcut keys, menu or Context menu commands
- automatically with the Duplicate command
- automatically using the Split command
- automatically using the command New Document Page(s)
- Individual Alias Objects can be changed into a copy and thereafter edited.
- An Alias object can be a Guide object independently of the original object. Alias objects
inherit the Guide object status automatically if the original object is a Guide object. If an
original object with connected Alias objects is transformed into a Guide object, the Alias
objects will not inherit this property automatically.
- The command Find Original can be used to find the original object in larger documents.

79
Working with Objects

Object Grouping
The application allows you to Group a number of objects on one page. This is particularly help-
ful if a group of several different objects are to be treated as one object.

Create and recognize a Group


You can use the Group command whenever there are more than two objects selected. The
application also supports hierarchical grouping. This means a group may be part of another
group. There is no upper limit to the number of groups.

Create a Group:
1. Select at least two objects.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + G (Windows/Linux) or Command + G (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > Group.
A group has been created successfully when the selected objects are deselected and a rectan-
gular frame is shown around these objects.

Creating a Group Hierarchy:


1. Select both the group you created in the previous example and an additional object.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + G (Windows/Linux) or Command + G (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > Group.
An Alias object can also be part of a group. Changes made to the original object will still be
inherited by the Alias object.

Create a Group with an Alias object:


1. Select at least two objects.
2. Create Alias objects of both objects and place them on the page below their original objects.
3. Select the first original object and the second Alias object.
4. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + G (Windows/Linux) or Command + G (Mac).
- Select the menu command Object > Group.
If the second original object in the upper row is selected and modified, the changes will of
course be reflected in the Alias object in the group. You can also create an Alias of a group.

Create Alias of a Group:


1. Select the group from the previous example.

80 2. Choose one of the following options:


Working with Objects

- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + x (multiplication) or Ctrl + Shift + * (Windows/Linux) or


Command + * (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > Alias > Create Alias.
REFERENCE
Section Working with Alias Objects

Select objects in a group


It frequently happens that you need to modify an object which is part of a group. You do not
need to ungroup the whole group first; you can select and edit single objects in the group
directly.

Select object in a group:


1. Select an object group.
2. Choose one of the following options to deactivate the group mode:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + U (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + U (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > Group Mode Active.
3. Select the desired object in the group and make some modifications to the attributes (e.g.
object size/position, fill color/density or frame color/density) as already described.
4. Choose one of the following options to reactivate the group mode:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + U (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + U (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > Group Mode Active.

Ungroup
This command enables you to disable the group feature and display the elements in their origi-
nal state. Since the program works with hierarchic groups, there may be groups within groups.
This hierarchy is retained when ungrouping. Therefore you may need to repeat the Ungroup
command several times to ungroup the group completely.
Ungroup:
1. Select the group.
2. Choose one of the following options to deactivate the group mode:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + U (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + U (Mac).
Note:
Please note that Alias objects are virtual copies of their original objects. If a group of grouped
objects which has a corresponding Alias group is ungrouped, the Alias group will completely
disappear since it can not be broken down into singular objects.

81
Working with Objects

Summary Object Grouping


- Objects can be grouped with the menu command Object > Group or by using the shortcut
keys Ctrl + G (Windows/Linux) or Command + G (Mac).
- Alias objects can be part of a group. The original object does not have to be part of that
group.
- Objects in a group may be edited individually without the group being ungrouped by
pressing the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + U (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + U (Mac).
- The content of grouped objects can only be edited when the group mode is deactivated.
- Pressing the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + U (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + U (Mac)
again reactivates the group mode.
- Groups are ungrouped with the menu command Object > Ungroup or by using the shortcut
keys Ctrl + U (Windows/Linux) or Command + U (Mac).
- An Alias object of a group of original objects will completely disappear if the original
objects are ungrouped. A Warning dialog will be displayed in this case.

82
Working with Layers

Working with Layers


The Layer Palette in VivaDesigner works in similar ways to the Layer Palettes in
other well-known layout, illustration and photo editing programs, but offers
additional and innovative features. The palette itself consists of two sections.
The upper section displays the layers, each of which is displayed in a different
color. The lower section displays all the objects on the working area that are
stored on the current (selected) layer. The Layer Palette is only available in
licensed editions of VivaDesigner and NOT in the Free Edition. The extensive
functionality of the Layer Palette provides you with a large number of benefits
when working with VivaDesigner. The functionality and some benefits are
listed below:

Layer Management
- Create an unlimited number of layers and give them individual names for greater clarity.
- Edit layers and assign personalized colors to them.
- Change the layer hierarchy at any time.
- Place text objects in different languages on different layers. This enables the storage of
several languages in one document and avoids potential editing errors in the layout.
- Switch layers containing graphics, logos or images on or off to output different versions of
the same document.
- Lock layers with a password so that the objects contained on them cannot be edited. This
enables you to prevent another user from changing or deleting your work as he can only
work on the layers that you have not locked.
- Make layers “non-printable” - objects placed on these layers will not be output. This is
particularly useful in designing packaging documents as you can put the punch outline
on a non-printable layer.

Object Management
- Arrange objects on different layers for improved object management (i.e. text on layer 1,
images on layer 2, logos on layer 3, etc.)
- Change the object hierarchy within a layer.
- Move objects from layer to layer. Move objects to a password-protected layer to prevent
them from being edited.
- Delete objects from page using the object section of Layer Palette and the Context Menu.
- Keep run around functionality of objects on layers or switch this option off as required.

83
Working with Layers

New Layers
Every new document always has Layer 1 as default.

Create New Layer:


1. Move the mouse pointer to the upper section of the Layer Palette, which should already dis-
play the default Layer 1 with a light blue color. If the palette is not visible, select the option
Layer Palette in the View menu.
2. Right click to open the Context Menu and choose the command New Layer.
The new layer will be created and displayed in a default color above the existing layer. At the
same time the new layer is activated for the creation of new objects, which is shown by the
pencil symbol on the right of the palette.
You can repeat the operation to create the number of new layers needed at any time. All new
layers are created at the top of the list, on top of the existing layers.

Remove Layers
Layers that are no longer needed may be removed very simply.

Remove Layer:
1. Select the layer you wish to remove.
2. Right click to open the Context Menu and choose the command Remove Layer.
3. Confirm the action by clicking the Yes button in the Warning dialog.

Manage Layers
Edit Layers
Once you have created your new layer, you can edit it with the Layer Options dialog.

Edit Layer:
1. Select the layer you wish to edit.
2. Right click to open the Context Menu and choose the command Edit Layer.
3. Choose the options you need from the Layer Options dialog:
- Give the Layer an individual name by entering it in the Name field.
- Choose a different color by clicking the default color. The Select Color dialog opens to
allow you to select a new color.
- Click the checkbox Show Layer on or off. The eye symbol disappears from the Layer Palette
when the layer is switched off, but it can be switched on again at any time.

84
Working with Layers

- Click the checkbox Print Layer on or off according to requirements. The option Print Layer
is activated as default. The layer will however ONLY be printed/output if the option Show
Layer is also switched on.
- Click the checkbox Lock Layer to activate the function. If the layer is locked, no new
objects may be created on it. You can however move objects from another layer to this
layer, which locks their current position and makes them unselectable as long as the
layer is locked.
- Click the checkbox Password Protection. Enter the password in both fields of the Define
Password dialog. You can check it by activating the checkbox Make visible.
- The default option Keep Run Around is always activated in a new layer. If you do not
need runaround effects for objects on the layer you have selected, you may switch this
option off.

Switch Layers on and off


If your document has a large number of layers (e.g. different languages, different graphics/
images for different markets, etc., you will want to switch off layers which you do not want to
output. It is not necessary to edit the layer each time - just as with other applications that work
with layers, you can switch the individual layers off by clicking the eye symbol on the left side
of the Layer Palette. To switch the layer on again, click the left hand side of the palette on the
point where the eye symbol should be.

Layer Hierarchy
When structuring your document, you may realize that due to the layer hierarchy objects on
one layer are covered by those of another layer. You can change the layer hierarchy in the
Layer Palette quite easily.

Change Layer Hierarchy:


1. Click on the color symbol of the layer you want to move.
2. With the mouse button held down, drag the layer to its new position and release the mouse
button when the warning symbol disappears.

85
Working with Layers

Manage Objects on Layers


You can now draw objects on the new layer. For further information on the creation of objects,
please see the chapter Working with Objects.

Create an object on the new layer:


1. Ensure that the required layer is active for creating objects:
- Click the right hand side of the Layer Palette to select the layer. The pencil symbol will be
displayed for the selected layer.
2. Create an object of your choice, for example a rectangular text object. You will see that the
sizing handles and the virtual frame are displayed in the color of the layer. At the same time
the object will be displayed in the object section of the Layer Palette with the appropriate
object symbol, the name (e.g. Rectangular Text Object) and a colored square showing the
color applied to the layer.
An object may be moved to another layer at any time.

Move the object to Layer 1:


1. Choose one of the following options:
- Click the color symbol of the layer with the object you want to select. The layer will be
selected and highlighted. Select the required object in the object section of the Layer
Palette. Hold down the mouse button and drag the object to Layer 1.
- Select the object on the page using the methods described in the chapter Working with
Objects. Click the object symbol in the object section of the Layer Palette. Hold down the
mouse button and drag the object to Layer 1.
The second option is quite useful if you already have a lot of objects on the page, as then the
selected object will be marked in the object section of the Layer Palette.
The object is moved to Layer 1 and the color of its sizing handles and virtual frame changes
accordingly. Switching to Layer 1 displays the object in the object section of the Layer Palette
with the appropriate color symbol.

Duplicating, Copying and Pasting Objects on Layers


Objects are duplicated using the command Duplicate as described in the chapter Working with
Objects. The duplicates are placed on the same layer as the original and may be moved to
other layers as described above. You can also copy or cut an object from one layer and paste to
the active layer without changing layers.

Copy an object and paste to the active layer:


1. Ensure that the layer to which you want to paste the copied object is selected and that the
pencil symbol is displayed in the Layer Palette.
2. Select the object on the page that you want to copy. The layer on which the object is placed
and the object itself will be shown in the appropriate sections of the Layer Palette.
3. Use the Copy command to copy the object.
86
Working with Layers

4. Without making any other changes, use the Paste command to paste the object to the active
layer.

Cut an object and paste to the active layer:


1. Ensure that the layer to which you want to paste the cut object is selected and that the pencil
symbol is displayed in the Layer Palette.
2. Select the object you want to cut from the layer. The layer on which the object is placed and
the object itself will be shown in the appropriate sections of the Layer Palette.
3. Use the Cut command to cut the object.
4. Use the Paste command to paste the object to the active layer.
After you have practiced for a while you may find that you now have a large number of objects
on your document page that you do not want or need.

Remove an individual object:


1. Select the object.
2. Delete the object:
- Delete the object using the Del key or the Backspace key in the usual way.
- Select the object in the object section of the Layer Palette. Right click and choose the
command Remove Object(s) from the Context Menu.

Remove several objects from two or more layers:


1. Select the objects to be removed. The layers on which the objects are placed will be selected
and ALL the objects on those layers will be displayed in the object section of the Layer Palette
with the selected objects highlighted.
2. Delete the objects:
- Delete the objects using the Del key or the Backspace key in the usual way.
- Move the mouse pointer over one of the objects in the object section of the Layer Palette.
Right click and choose the command Remove Object(s).
- Create a new layer, move the relevant objects to it and delete the layer.

87
Working with Layers

Naming objects on layers


You have already learned that layers may be given individual names to achieve greater clarity
in complex documents. All objects have default names which are translated into the program
interface language, insofar as such translations are known. With text objects, as soon as some
text is typed, the standard object name will be replaced by the first (maximum) 32 characters
of the text. If a picture object contains a picture, the standard object name will be replaced by
the picture file name. If the picture file name or the 32 characters of cryptic text do not achieve
the required clarity, you can name the picture or text objects in the Layer Palette according to
preference.

Name objects on layers:


1. Select the object in question and click the name of the object in the object section of the
Layer Palette.
2. Rename the object by marking the existing name and typing a new one.
3. Click elsewhere to confirm your new definition.

Grouping Objects on Layers


All the principles explained about grouping objects in the chapter Working with Objects
apply, but when working with layers the following additional points must be noted:
- The new group will be created on the active layer shown with the pencil symbol in the
Layer Palette. The group can then be moved to another layer if required.
- The new group will be displayed in the object section of the Layer Palette with the default
name Group, which may also be changed if required.
- The new group is shown with a plus sign (+) before it. Clicking the plus sign enables you to
open the group to see which objects it contains.
- The command Ungroup leaves the objects on the same layer. They may then be moved to
other layers if required.
- You can repeat the grouping operation to bring further objects or groups into your new
group.
- You can completely remove/delete objects in a group.

Managing and editing grouped objects on layers


In the Layer Palette you can also select objects belonging to a group, and change their graphic
attributes using the Module Palette, ALTHOUGH the Group Mode is activated in the Object
menu. We will demonstrate this functionality with a simple exercise.

Changing attribute of a grouped object:


1. Create 2 Graphic objects: a square and a circle.
2. Group the objects.
3. Open the group with a click on the Plus sign in the object section of the Layer Palette.
88
Working with Layers

4. Select the circle.


5. Go to the Module Palette and change some of the object’s attributes (e.g. X/Y coordinates,
fill color, frame, etc.).

Tips & Tricks for working with layers


- Name your layers according to the object(s) placed on them (e.g. Punch, Logos, Barcode,
etc.), the text language for a translator, alternative CI, etc.
- Name your objects for greater clarity and ease of work.
- To remove a large number of objects from the document, create a new layer, move all the
objects you want to delete to the layer and then remove the layer.
- Lock layers with a password so that they cannot be edited by mistake.
- In Facing Page mode all objects placed on all the pages in the spread as well as all those in
the working area will be displayed in the object section of the Layer Palette.
- If you are using automatic text objects to make a text chain, renaming the text objects on
the Alias page(s) will NOT have any effect. You can however apply a name, page by page,
to the text objects as a page reference for the text. Objects on the Alias page that are not
linked in the text chain such as the page number may be renamed and their names will be
taken over and displayed in document page mode.
- Use a non-printable layer and place colored opaque objects on it that cover the text
objects to be edited. This can help the user to see where he must enter his text. The non-
printable layer must be locked and password-protected so that the user cannot access it.

89
Working with Text
Working with Text

Working with Text


Text plays a central part in nearly all documents and publications. For centuries
the written word has been the bearer of information of all types. To create text
safely and quickly and to select and edit it, the program offers you a huge array
of commands, which may already be familiar to you from word-processing
software.

Creating Text objects


VivaDesigner is an object oriented typesetting and layout program. This means all text in this
program is processed using text frames or text objects. You need to create text objects before
you can enter or modify text. Text is composed and modified within an object, and the object‘s
outer measurements determine the frame of the text.
Text objects in the application may have any form as long as they are closed. A new text object
is created by means of the closed object tools in the Toolbar.
The program offers you several ways to create Text objects:

Create a new text object interactively


1. Choose one of the following options:
- Click in the Toolbar on the Text object tool to choose the default or last text object tool
selected.
- Click the arrow on the right hand side of the tool and choose a tool in the upper section
(Type 1) to create a text object with the text running from left to right.
- Click the arrow on the right hand side of the tool and choose a tool in the middle section
(Type 2) to create a text object with the text running from right to left (e.g. for Arabic,
Hebrew, etc.).
- Click the arrow on the right hand side of the tool and choose a tool in the lower section
(Type 3) to create a text object with the text running from top to bottom (e.g. for Chinese,
etc.).
2. Click on the document page and create your Text object.
It may be quicker for you to create your Text object using the menu or shortcut keys:

Create a new Text object with Menu/shortcut keys:


1. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Shift + T (Windows/Linux) or Command + Shift + T (Mac).
- Select the menu command Object >Content > Text.
You can also create a Text object by converting another closed object into a Text object.

91
Working with Text

If you change a graphic object into a text object the conversion will be immediate. However if a
picture object is changed into a text object an alert message may appear warning you that the
picture’s content will be lost.

Convert an existing object into a Text object:


1. Choose an existing closed object.
2. Choose one of the following options
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Shift + T (Windows/Linux) or Command + Shift + T (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object >Content > Text.
- Choose the command Content > Text in the context menu.
Editable Text obects can also be created be creating an Alias text object with variable content
or by converting an existing Alias Text object to a copy of the original.

Create a Text object by creating an Alias object with variable content:


1. Create a Text object and enter some text in it.
2. Choose an appropriate option to activate the Object mode:
- Click on the object frame.
- Click anywhere in the text while holding down the Ctrl key (Windows/Linux) or the
Command key (Mac).
- Move the mouse over the middle of the object until the gray Object Mode Select button
appears and click once.
3. Choose one of the following options to open the Special Settings dialog:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + M (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + M (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > Special.
- With the right mouse button held down, choose the command Special in the Context menu.
4. Choose the option Individual Alias Content and confirm with OK.
5. Choose an appropriate option to create an Alias object from the Text object:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + x (Multiplication) or Ctrl + Shift + * (Windows/Linux), or
Command + * (Mac).
- - Select the menu command Object > Alias > Create Alias.
Now you can write a different text in the Alias Object. The object attributes (Fill Color/Shade,
Frame Color/Shade/Style) are determined by those of the original object.
If you now select the object and choose the menu command Object > Alias > Change into a Copy,
the Alias object will be converted to an independent copy of the original. Both the content and
the graphic attributes can then be edited at will.

92
Working with Text

Summary Creating Text Objects


- Text objects can be created by using the Toolbar.
- Text objects can be created automatically using the shortcut keys Ctrl + Shift + T (Windows/
Linux) or Command + Shift + T (Mac), or with the menu command Object > Content > Text,
providing no other object is selected.
- Text objects can be created by converting other object types.
- Modifiable text objects can also be created by converting Alias text objects into copies of
the original.

Text mode
Activate/leave Text mode
To enter or import text into a text object you will need to enable the text mode. As you already
know the mouse pointer will automatically change into the appropriate pointer for the specific
object type.
When the mouse pointer is positioned over a text object it will change into an I-beam (text)
pointer.

Activate Text mode:


Click the mouse on the surface of the Text object.
After the text mode is selected by clicking on the object,
- the Text menu will appear.
- the Module palette (in Text mode) will appear, providing the palette has not been closed.
- the object frame will be highlighted. This imaginary frame shows where the mouse
pointer will change into the object pointer with which you can select and move the
object itself.
- hollow handles will appear. These handles show that you are in Text mode and indicate
where the mouse pointer will change into the sizing pointer with which the object can be
resized.
To activate Text mode in a text object which is part of a group of objects, the Group Mode must
be deactivated, if you do not want to Ungroup the objects.

Activate Text mode in object groups:


1. Choose one of the following options to deactivate the Group mode:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + U (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + U (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > Group mode Active.
2. Click with the mouse pointer on the text object as previously described.

93
Working with Text

You can leave the Text mode by selecting another object, selecting no object or by selecting
the current Text object.

Leave Text mode:


Choose one of the following options to leave Text mode:
- Click anywhere in the document window where there is no object positioned.
- Change to Object mode by holding down the Ctrl key (Windows/Linux) or the Command
key (Mac), and click the current Text object or another object.
- Click with the mouse pointer on a sizing handle of the current Text object and hold down
the mouse button to resize the object. The program changes to Object mode automatically.
- Move the mouse over the middle of the object until the gray Object Mode Select button
appears and click once. If the button does not appear, the object height or width is too
small and you must choose another option.

Summary Activate/Leave Text mode


If Text mode is enabled the program will display the following:
- The blinking insertion point or cursor in the text.
- A highlighted frame for all objects that are part of the current linked text chain, whether
the command Show Guides is activated in the View menu or not.
- The Text menu.
- The Module palette (Text mode), if the palette was not specifically hidden.
- Hollow handles, if the object is an original object, and not a Flexible Alias Text object.

Entering text
Entering and correcting text
To define the appearance of a text you have two possibilities. First of all settings may be made
in dialogs and palettes, which will take effect for all text entered after the current cursor position.
Secondly, settings and modifications may be made to existing text passages if these have not
previously been marked.

The insertion point (cursor)


To edit a specific piece of text, move the insertion point to the text either using the arrow keys
or by clicking the mouse pointer at the specific location. Once you have clicked the pointer will
change from the I-beam pointer into a blinking insertion point.
If you click the margin between the object frame and the text VivaDesigner will position the
insertion point at the location closest to that point.

94
Working with Text

If the insertion point is positioned in an empty text object it will automatically appear in the
upper left corner of the object. Positioning the insertion point on a page of the document
where as yet no text has been entered will cause it to spring back to the end of the entered text
automatically.
The application also allows you to position the insertion point using keyboard commands.

Summary cursor
Move to Shortcut
Next character Arrow-right
Previous character Arrow-left
Next line Arrow-down
Previous line Arrow-up
Next word Ctrl + Arrow-right (Window/Linux),
Command + Arrow-right (Mac)
Previous word Ctrl + Arrow-left (Window/Linux),
Command + Arrow-left (Mac)
Next paragraph Ctrl + Arrow-down (Window/Linux),
Command + Arrow-down (Mac)
Previous paragraph Ctrl + Arrow-up (Window/Linux),
Command + Arrow-up (Mac)
End of line Ctrl + Alt + Arrow-right (Window/Linux),
Command + Option + Arrow-right (Mac)
Beginning of line Ctrl + Alt + Arrow-left (Window/Linux),
Command + Option + Arrow-left (Mac)

Entering functions
As well as Text with a fixed length, the program enables you to insert functions that possess a
variable length. In total of nine functions are available in the Menu section Insert function.
To insert a function in the text, position the cursor in the Text object. Select any function from
the Text menu that you want to insert into your text automatically. It may occur with page
commands that instead of a character a space is entered. This happens when the function
selected has an invalid value or parameter. If for example on the first and only page of a docu-
ment the function Last Page Number or Continued from is inserted, the function will be
replaced by a space.

Enter a function:
1. Set the cursor at the required position.
2. Select a function from the Text menu OR the Context menu:
- Choose Insert Space, and select a suitable option from the popup menu.
95
Working with Text

- Choose Insert Hyphens and Dashes and select an option from the popup menu.
- Choose Insert Line Breaks and select an option from the popup menu.
- Choose Insert Variable and select an option from the popup menu.
- Choose Object and select an option from the popup menu to insert a floating object.
Note:
The object types available for import depend on your license.
If you import a picture object, the object will be sized according to the width of the text
object. You can edit the size and content of the object at any time after importing.
If the image you want to import is large, it may be that you will see a text overflow in the
bottom right hand corner of the text object. If this should occur, cancel the floating object
import, create a picture object with its content outside the text object, and edit its size and
content accordingly. Then cut the object and paste it into the text at the required position.

Importing text
As well as the possibility of entering or pasting text, the application allows the import of text
files, which may be available in various formats.

Import with the Import command:


1. Place the insertion point in the Text object.
2. Choose an appropriate option:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + E (Windows/Linux) or Command + E (Mac).
- Choose the menu command File > Import.
3. Choose a *.txt or an *.rtf file from the dialog.
4. Click the Open button.
Note:
When you import *.txt files, the program will open the dialog Select Text Encoding. In this
dialog you can choose the encoding for the text file you want to import.
When you import *.rtf files whose text has various attributes, then these too will be imported
as far as is possible.

Selecting text
Selecting text passages
In order to apply a command to a text block, you need first to define the text block to which
the command should be applied.
Similar to the positioning of the insertion point, the program offers several keyboard com-
mands to do this. It is of course also possible to select text interactively.

96
Working with Text

Single text passages


To select single text passages with the mouse, position the insertion point at the start, or at the
end, of the text you want to select. Hold down the mouse button while you drag the mouse
across the text.
You will be able to see on your monitor that the area selected is marked with the help of the
mouse. Once you have selected the text release the mouse button.
To select text using the keyboard you position the insertion point at the start or at the end of
the text you want to select. Hold down the Shift key and use the arrow keys to mark your text
selection.
The Left and Right arrow keys will select the text in that direction, the Up and Down arrow keys
will select the text at the line above and under the current insertion point.

Mark a text passage with the mouse:


1. Place the insertion point at the required position in the text.
2. Hold down the mouse button and drag the mouse across the text.

Mark a text passage with keyboard commands:


1. Place the insertion point at the required position in the text.
2. Hold down the Shift key and use the arrow keys to select the appropriate text passage.

Mark a text passage with keystrokes:


1. Place the insertion point at the required position in the text.
2. Hold down the Shift key and click at another point in the text.
The text between the insertion point and the position you clicked has now been selected.
If the beginning and end of the text passage you wish to mark are not both visible at the same
time or are on separate pages, marking the text can be tricky . In this case therefore you should
proceed exactly as described above.

Marking across pages:


1. Place the insertion point in the text, either at the beginning or end of the area to be marked.
2. Move to the other end of the area to be marked.
3. Hold down the Shift key and click on the point where the text passage to be marked starts or
finishes.
Here too the text between the insertion point and the point you have defined will be marked.

Selecting text elements


A text object contains different text elements, such as a word, a line and a paragraph.

Select a word interactively with the mouse:


97 1. Position the I-beam pointer over a word.
Working with Text

2. Double-click the word.


The program will recognize a character string delimited by a space character or a punctuation
mark as a word. A soft hyphen will also be considered a punctuation mark as long as it is not
automatically generated by the program.

Select a line interactively with the mouse:


1. Position the I-beam pointer on a line.
2. Triple click the line.

Select a sentence interactively with the mouse:


1. Position the I-beam pointer in a sentence.
2. Click four times to select the sentence.

Select a paragraph interactively with the mouse:


1. Position the I-beam pointer over a paragraph.
2. Click five times to select the whole paragraph.
Precise text selection is also possible using the keyboard.

Choose a word using the keyboard:


1. Position the insertion point at the beginning of the word.
2. Hold down the shortcut keys Ctrl + Shift (Windows/Linux) or Command + Shift (Mac) and
press the arrow-right key.
ATTENTION: This will also select the space character after the word.
Selection of lines or paragraphs using the keyboard will not always result in the selection of the
whole line or the whole paragraph. This depends upon the position of the insertion point.

Choose text passage with the keyboard:


Choose an appropriate option:
- Hold down the Shift key and press the Pos 1 or Home key (Windows/Linux) to select all the
text from before the insertion point to the beginning of the line.
- Press the shortcut keys Command + Option + Shift and press the arrow-left key (Mac) to
select all the text from before the insertion point to the beginning of the line.
- Hold down the Shift key and press the arrow-left key to select single text characters
between the insertion point and the beginning of the line. (Windows/Linux/Mac).
- Hold down the Shift key and press the End key (Windows/Linux) to select all the text from
after the insertion point to the end of the line.
- Press the shortcut keys Command + Option + Shift and press the arrow-right key (Mac) to
select all the text from after the insertion point to the end of the line.
- Hold down the Shift key and press the arrow-right key to select single text characters
98 between the insertion point and the end of the line. (Windows/Linux/Mac).
Working with Text

- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Shift (Windows/Linux) or Command + Shift (Mac) and press
the arrow-down key to select all the text from after the insertion point to the end of the
paragraph.
- Hold down the Shift key and press the arrow-down key to select all the text line by line
after the insertion point. (Windows/Linux/Mac). The text will always be selected up to
the horizontal position of the insertion point.
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Shift (Windows/Linux) or Command + Shift (Mac) and press
the arrow-up key to select all the text from before the insertion point to the beginning of
the paragraph.
- Hold down the Shift key and press the arrow-up key to select all the text line by line
before the insertion point. (Windows/Linux/Mac). The text will always be selected up to
the horizontal position of the insertion point.

Select the whole text


The program offers several ways to select all the text in a linked text chain. In the application
you can select text interactively with the mouse, with menu commands or with the keyboard.

Select the whole text with the mouse:


1. Place the insertion point anywhere in the text chain.
2. Choose a suitable option:
- Click the mouse button six times quickly.
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + A (Windows/Linux) or Command + A (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Edit > Select All.

Change current text selection


If you need to extend or reduce your current text selection, you don’t have to start again. Hold
down the Shift key and click to change the current selection.

Change text selection:


1. Hold down the Shift key.
2. Position the insertion point at the desired position in the text.
3. Release the mouse button.
The current text selection will now be extended or reduced to the position of the insertion
point. Such a change may mean a reduction or an extension of the area selected.

Deselect a text selection


To deselect a text selection simply click the text once. The current text selection will also be
deselected if you leave the text mode.

99
Working with Text

Editing text
Delete and replace text
There are two ways to delete single characters or text blocks.
To delete a single character you can use the Backspace or the Forward Delete key. The Backspace
key deletes the character before the insertion point. The Forward Delete key deletes the character
after the insertion point.
To delete larger text blocks, you mark a text area and use the Backspace key to delete it or select
the appropriate menu command.

Delete previous character:


1. Position the insertion point in the text.
2. Press the Backspace key to delete the character before the insertion point.

Delete next character:


1. Position the insertion point in the text.
2. Press the Forward Delete or Del key to delete the character after the insertion point

Delete text passages:


1. Mark/Select a text passage.
2. Choose an appropriate option to delete the selected passage:
- Press the Backspace key or the Forward Delete or Del key.
- Choose the menu command Edit > Delete.
You can also delete text by replacing it. First select the text you want to replace and enter a
new text or use the Paste command in the Edit menu to replace the selected text by the con-
tents of the Clipboard.

Deleting and replacing text selections:


1. Mark/Select a text passage.
2. Choose the menu command Edit > Paste to replace the text with the contents of the Clipboard.

Cut text
Another way to delete text is by cutting it using the Cut command. If a text selection is cut, the
text will be removed from the document and copied to the Clipboard. The difference between
deleting and cutting is that cut text can be pasted back into any point in the document, so
long as no ther text has been cut or copied.

Cut text:
1. Place the insertion point in the text and select a text passage.
100 2. Choose an appropriate option:
Working with Text

- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + X (Windows/Linux) or Command + X (Mac).


- Choose the menu command Edit > Cut.
- Choose the command Cut in the Context menu.
When text is cut and thus copied to the Clipboard, all text properties will be copied as well.
This means that properties like font size, style and color as well as Text Style Sheets will all be
stored. When pasting the text back into the document or into another document the text you
paste will look exactly like the text you cut. The only situation in which this cannot be guaran-
teed is when the names of Colors and Style Sheets are identical but the underlying definitions
have been modified.

Copy text
Apart from deleting and cutting text, text can also be copied. This operation is very similar to
the Cut command. As with cutting text, the text will be copied to the Clipboard but it will not
be removed from the document.

Copy text:
1. Place the insertion point in the text and select a text passage.
2. Choose an appropriate option:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + C (Windows/Linux) or Command + C (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Edit > Copy.
- Choose the command Copy in the Context menu.

Paste text
The commands Cut and Copy are only useful if you need to reuse the text somewhere else in
your documents. Cut or copied text passages may be pasted back into your document any-
where.

Paste text:
1. Copy some text.
2. Position the insertion point at any position in the text.
3. Choose an appropriate option:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + V (Windows/Linux) or Command + V (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Edit > Paste.
- Choose the command Paste in the Context menu.
4. Repeat the instructions from the previous example, but now use the Cut command instead
of the Copy command.

101
Working with Text

Note:
When text is pasted all text properties will be stored. This means that properties like font
size, style and color will be identical to the text which was cut or copied. The only situation
in which this cannot be guaranteed is when the color and style names are identical but the
underlying definitions have been modified.

Exporting text
As well as importing text, the text in the current text chain may also be exported as a text file
which may be edited in other programs. This export is a pure ASCII-Format. This means that the
exported text has no attributes. After selecting the command Export > As a Text file In the File
menu the dialog for saving documents will be displayed.

Export Text:
1. Place the insertion point in the Text object.
2. Choose the menu command File > Export > As a Text file.
3. Enter a file name for the text chain to be exported.
4. Close the dialog by clicking the Save button.
5. If necessary enter an Encoding type.
6. Click OK to close the dialog.

Managing attributes
In the following paragraphs we will describe special text properties such as language, font size,
alignment and line spacing can be assigned to the text.
The application has two different ways of handling the modification of these properties: They
are either automatically applied to the current selection or they will be applied to all text after
the insertion point.
If an attribute is set when no text is marked, the new settings for the text will only affect the
text that is entered to the right of the insertion point.

Tabs
Tabs are used to align text at specific horizontal intervals. Tabs are often used to create tables.
A tab stop indicates an exact position in the document at which characters are aligned. Viva
uses four different types of tabs : left, center, right and decimal tabs.
To define the position and type of tab stops, choose the menu command Text > Tabs.
After a left tab stop the text will (still) flow from left to right.
A right tab stop will align the text to the left of the tab stop until it reaches the position of the
tab stop.

102
Working with Text

A special case of a right tab stop is the decimal tab stop. The text will align to the left of the tab
stop until it reaches the position of a decimal character. A decimal character can be a comma
or a point. For this reason the decimal tab is most often used in price lists.
The center tab stop will align the text around the tab stop.

Search and Replace


A basic function in any word processor or layout program is a powerful Search and Replace
command. The application allows you to search for characters, invisibles or text properties
which can then be replaced by other characters, invisibles and text properties.

Search and Replace a character string:


1. Position the insertion point at the start of the text in the text object.
2. Choose an appropriate option:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + F (Windows/Linux) or Command + F (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Edit > Search & Replace.
3. Choose the option Search and enter a character string in the entry field.
4. Click on the option Replace and enter another character string in the entry field.
5. Click the Search button.
6. Now click the button Replace & Search to check every single string found before replacing,
or click the button Replace All to make the changes without query.

Search and Replace invisibles:


1. Position the insertion point at the start of the text in the text object.
2. Choose an appropriate option:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + F (Windows/Linux) or Command + F (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Edit > Search & Replace.
3. Choose the option Search and click the Invisibles icon on the right of the entry field.
4. Choose an option from the popup menu.
5. Choose the option Replace and click the Invisibles icon on the right of the entry field.
6. Choose an option from the popup menu.
7. Click the Search button.
8. Now click the button Replace & Search to check every single string found before replacing,
or click the button Replace All to make the changes without query.
Now we will search for a character string in the document that is to be assigned with a different
color.

103
Working with Text

Search and Replace attributes:


1. Position the insertion point at the start of the text in the text object.
2. Choose an appropriate option:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + F (Windows/Linux) or Command + F (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Edit > Search & Replace.
3. Choose the option Search. Click the popup menu (default: Text)and select an attribute.
4. Choose the option Replace. Click the popup menu (default: Text)and select an attribute.
5. Now click the button Replace & Search to check every single string found before replacing,
or click the button Replace All to make the changes without query.
TIP:
If in the document there are Text objects not linked to the text chain, the option Document in
the sector Direction & Area should be selected to check all character strings.
Use the arrow buttons underneath the entry fields in both sectors to search for or replace
with a combination of your choice, such as Text XYZ, Font Arial Bold, Size 12 pt and Color
[Magenta], replace with Style Sheet [Body Text].
Use the options in the Case sector to define your needs more exactly.

Index and Tables


The application has different internal memories for managing the index and tables. There are
altogether six different lists with the names Index, Contents Entry, Bibliography Entry, Abbrevi-
ation, Picture Entry and Chapter. The naming of these indexes is for your convenience only,
since technically you could generate a Table of Pictures for all bibliography entries or for
example for a list of authors.
The index generation facilities make the compilation of indexes a lot easier. The automatic
generation of an index allows for an up-to-date index with a high degree of accuracy.
An index may contain any character strings of up to 256 characters in length. A string contain-
ing a carriage return will only be indexed up to the carriage return.

Create an index entry for a text string:


1. Position the insertion point in the Text object.
2. Mark some text.
3. Choose the menu command Text > Mark as > Index Entry.
4. Repeat the last two steps for every section of text that you wish to include in the index.
To check the index an index must first be created.

Generate an index:
1. Position the insertion point in an empty Text object.
2. Choose the menu command Text > Create > Index.
104 An index will be created from marked entries from the current document.
Working with Text

Language, Spelling and Hyphenation


The application offers extensive functions to manage text in different lan-
guages in one document. Depending which version is supplied, the program
is supplied with different modules for hyphenation and spell-checking.
Depending on the program version and the available modules, you can assign
different languages to text passages, carry out language-oriented spelling
and grammar checks and define language-dependant hyphenation.

Language
When you launch your program version for the first time, an initial dialog will ask you to
define/confirm the program interface language and the default text language for all new text
objects. Which language will be automatically displayed as the initial default by the program
depends on the language of your operating system.
If for example you have an English operating system, the initial default language will be Eng-
lish, and a German operating system will have German assigned to it. Operating systems whose
language the program cannot recognise will automatically receive the default language Eng-
lish. These intial settings will be stored in the Viva program preferences file on your system.
You can redefine the language assigned to a Text as well as the default language for new text
objects at any time.

Assign a language to a text passage:


1. Mark the text passage or place the insertion point in the text at the point from which the
setting should take effect.
2. Choose the language required:
- Choose the language required in the popup menu Language in the section Font & Lan-
guage of the Character tab in the Module palette.
- Choose the language required in the Text > Language menu.
- Choose the option None if the text does not correspond to any of the languages offered
by the program or if it simply does not require any language assigned to it. In this way
you will ensure that no hyphenation will take place. Furthermore, your text will not be
affected by the Spell and Grammar Check functions or by the replacement of quotation
marks with typographic quotation marks. This option is also relevant if you are using
symbol fonts where the checking and replacement functions are not needed.
When a language is used in a document for the first time, assigning the language may take a
few seconds. If the language is assigned again, you don’t have to wait – the language will be
assigned immediately.
The assignment of the right language is very important for the correct structuring of the docu-
ment, as the program defines the Hyphenation and Spell Checking as well as typographic quo-
tation marks according to the languages defined.
105
Working with Text

Note:
You can still assign a language to a text or to all new text objects even if you do bot possess
the appropriate dictionaries or Hyphenation modules.
Assign a new language to be applied to all new text objects:
1. Open the Preferences dialog with the menu command Edit > Preferences (Windows/Linux) or
VivaDesigner > Preferences (Mac).
2. Choose the new language from the popup menu Language in the Text section:
- Choose the option None if you work with more than one language in your documents and
want to apply the different languages to the text manually or with the help of Style
Sheets. For more information on this subject please refer to the chapter Working with
Style Sheets.
3. Confirm your settings with OK, and close the program to ensure that the settings are saved
in the preferences file.

Hyphenation
The application offers extensive functions for perfect hyphenation of an excel-
lent quality. Below is a brief description:

- Automatic and manual hyphenation


With automatic hyphenation, the application refers to a hyphenation module and possible user
dictionaries. With manual hyphenation, the user can set both hard and soft hyphens.
- Selection of different modules for automatic hyphenation
As well as the standard modules, that are supplied with different program versions, modules
from other manufacturers may be used for hyphenation.
- Different hyphenation settings for paragraphs or words
You can use the settings for automatic hyphenation on paragraphs or on any character strings.
- Entry and management of hyphenation exceptions
The automatic hyphenation can be extended through user dictionaries if the modules do not
know a word or character string, or give them incorrect hyphenation under certain conditions.
- Language-dependant and global hyphenation
Hyphenation is language-dependant. This also goes for user dictionaries, which may be main-
tained individually by the user.
- Hyphenations with different quality levels (primarily for German)
Hyphenation may follow in different levels of quality. The quality levels are supported by some
hyphenation and language modules (e. g. German).
- Hyphenation with automatic replacement

106
Working with Text

Both the automatic hyphenation and the user dictionaries support the automatic replacement
of character strings in a case of hyphenation. Such replacements are indispensable in certain
languages for a high quality hyphenation.
- Automatic saving of all hyphenations in the document
All hyphenations calculated are saved in the document. Because of this a document may be
passed on, even if the recipient does not posess the appropriate hyphenation modules.

Define Hyphenation Module


Spelling and Hyphenation Checkers for different languages are included according to the pro-
gram version supplied. If you have installed hyphenation modules from other manufacturers,
these may be selected for every single language in the Preferences.

Choose Hyphenation module:


1. Open the Preferences dialog with the menu command Edit > Preferences (Windows/Linux) or
VivaDesigner > Preferences (Mac).
2. Click the entry Language and select the tab Spelling & Hyphenation.
3. Click the column Hyphenation for the appropriate language and select a module.
- If the column Hyphenation displays no entry, no module is selected or available for this
language.
- If the popup menu in the column Hyphenation displays just one entry, no additional
modules are available for this language.

Automatic Hyphenation Options


With the hyphenation options you determine if and how the automatic hyphenation will
hyphenate a word at the end of a line.

Activate Automatic Hyphenation:


1. Mark a text and choose one of the following options:
- Go to the Hyphenation section in the Paragraph tab of the Module palette.
- Choose the menu command Text > Hyphenation.
2. Choose the option Yes in the popup menu Hyphenation to activate the hyphenation using the
modules and user dictionaries installed. After the option has been activated, further settings
may be made:
- In the entry field Smallest Word, select the minimum number of characters allowed in a
string before a hyphenation. Strings with less characters will be ignored automatically
by the Hyphenation module.
- In the entry field Hyphens in a Row, select the number of lines that may have a hyphen at
the end of a line. If a value of 3 is entered, no hyphenation will occur on the fourth line,
even if a hyphenation is possible.

107
Working with Text

- In the entry field Minimum before, select the minimum number of characters for the
beginning of a word before the hyphenation. If a string of 10 characters is hyphenated
after the second, fifth and eighth character, the value 3, will mean that the first hyphen-
ation after the second character will not be made. In this case the first hyphenation will
be after the fifth character.
- - In the entry field Minimum after, select the minimum number of characters for the end
of a word after the hyphenation. If a string of 10 characters is hyphenated after the sec-
ond, fifth and eighth character, the value 3, will mean that the last hyphenation after the
eighth character will not be made. In this case the hyphenation will be after the fifth
character.
- - In the popup menu Quality, select the option No quality, if all the hyphenations in a
word should be made by the automatic hyphenation.
- - In the popup menu Quality, select the option Only good quality or better, if only the
hyphenations should be made that are of a good or very good quality. If the word has no
quality hyphenation, none will be made.
- - In the popup menu Quality, select the option Only best quality, if only the hyphena-
tions should be made that are of a very good quality. If the word has no quality hyphen-
ation, none will be made.
- - In the popup menu Quality, select the option Best possible quality, if only the hyphen-
ations should be made that are of a good or very good quality. If this quality is not
available for the string, the application will automatically use the option No quality.
Note:
- A character string can only be hyphenated when all conditions are fulfilled.
- The Automatic Hyphenation options may be made for any character strings or whole para-
graphs.
- The hyphenation quality settings are made independently of the actual possibilities of the
hyphenation module or the language. This can mean that the hyphenation will be made,
but that the settings for the quality will have no effect (e.g. in Spanish).
Deactivate Automatic Hyphenation:
1. Mark a text and select the menu command Text > Hyphenation.
2. Change the option Hyphenation to No to deactivate the hyphenation. After the option has
been deactivated, the other options in the dialog will be grayed out, but may still contain
settings.

Check Automatic Hyphenation


If you are not sure if the automatic hyphenation has hyphenated a string correctly, you can
check this using the command Hyphenation Suggestions. Please note that the suggested
hyphenation only shows possible hyphenations and their quality. The suggested hyphenation
does not show how and why a string will be hyphenated in special cases or not. Thus for
example the settings for the selected language, possible left and right indents, Aesthetic Rag
settings and all the settings in the Hyphenation dialog define if and how a string may be
hyphenated at a specific point.
108
Working with Text

Show Hyphenation Suggestions:


1. Mark a word and select the menu command Text > Hyphenation Suggestions.
2. The first line shows all the hyphenations that the application has found based on the
hyphenation module(s) and user dictionaries. A single dash between the syllables shows a
hyphenation without qualitative value. Two dashes show a qualitatively good value, three
dashes a high quality hyphenation.
3. The second line shows the selected language. Here you can see at once if the hyphenation is
wrong because the wrong language was assigned to the text.
4. The third line shows the hyphenation module that was selected for this language. If you
have installed hyphenation modules from different manufacturers, you can select these in
the Preferences.

Manage Hyphenation exceptions


If specialized terms or own names are used frequently by the user in his text, it is possible that
the program will not under certain circumstances be able to hyphenate them properly, as these
words are unknown. In such a case, a user dictionary for that language may be created to
which the automatic hyphenation will refer. In a hyphenation case, the application will first
refer to the user dictionary before it refers to the dictionaries and hyphenation algorithms
installed.

Define hyphenation exceptions:


1. Choose the menu command Edit > Preferences (Windows/Linux) or VivaDesigner > Preferences
(Mac).
2. Choose the entry User Dictionaries.
3. Choose the language for which the hyphenation exception should be created.
- Choose the language option Global if the word to be hyphenated appears in every language
and should always be hyphenated in the same way.
- If several hyphenation modules are available for a language, select the module that has
separated the word incorrectly or has not separated it at all.
4. Click in the entry field Word and enter a new character string using all possible hyphenations.
5. Klicken Sie auf das Schaltfeld Neu, um die neue Zeichenfolge in das Benutzerwörterbuch zu
übernehmen.

Define a No Hyphenation:
- If a word should never be hyphenated, enter the string without hyphens in the entry field
Word.
As well as the definition of a hyphenation exception, the user can also influence the quality of
the hyphenation, which is important in some languages. While for example in Spanish there are
no quality differences in hyphenation, German has a whole series of hyphenation qualities. This
is because the German language has a great many words that have been put together from
other words, which may then have hyphenations not only between syllables, but also between
109
Working with Text

the original words. Such hyphenations are also called Preferred Hyphenations. The quality of a
hyphenation is defined by the number of dashes entered between two syllables.

Define hyphenation quality:


- In the entry field Word, enter a dash between the syllables to create a possible
hyphenation without any quality.
- In the entry field Word, enter two dashes between the syllables to create a good
hyphenation.
- In the entry field Word, enter three dashes between the syllables to create an excellent
quality hyphenation.

Spell Check
With the Spelling and Grammar Checkers you can check a document for spelling errors and
according to the program module supplied also check for grammatical correctness. To carry
out the Spell and Grammar Checks correctly, it is necessary for the appropriate modules to be
loaded when starting the program.
Depending on the program version supplied, the software comes with a module for Spell Check
and Hyphenation for different languages. If you have installed hyphenation modules from
other manufacturers, these may be selected for every single language in the Preferences.

Define Spell Check Module:


1. Choose the menu command Edit > Preferences (Windows/Linux) or VivaDesigner > Preferences
(Mac).
2. Click the entry Language and select the tab Spell Check & Hyphenation.
3. Click the column Spell Check for the appropriate language and select a module.
- If the column Spell Check displays no entry, no module is selected or available for this
language.
- if the popup menu in the column Spell Check displays just one entry, no other modules
are available for this language.

Manual Spell Check


The program enables a Spell Check of marked text passages, the current text chain or the whole
document. When checking the current text chain, the check is made from the position of the
insertion point to the end of the text. It does not matter if the end of the text is visible in the
screen or not.

Start manual Spell Check:


1. Mark a text passage or place the insertion point at the point in the text from which the Spell
Check should start.
2. Choose the menu command Text > Spell Check.

110
Working with Text

3. If the application finds an unknown character sequence, the dialog Spell and Grammar
Check will open. In the upper dialog section, the unknown character sequence will be shown
in red in the context of the current sentence or paragraph.
- If you want to replace the unknown character sequence with one of the suggestions,
double-click the entry in the list.
- Alternatively, select the entry in the list and click the Change button
- lternatively, change the unknown character sequence in the entry field Change to and
click the Change button.
- Click the Change Always button if you assume that the error will occur again.
- Click the Ignore button if the unknown character sequence is correct but you do not want
to take over the unknown character sequence in your dictionary.
- Click the Ignore Always button if you assume that the unknown character sequence will
appear several times in the text.
- Click the Learn button if the unknown character sequence is correct and you want to take
over the character sequence in your personal language dictionary. The new sequence
will be imported into the dictionary displayed in the popup menu Language.
- Alternatively, change the language in the popup menu if the character sequence is
assigned the wrong language. After this it is possible that new suggestions will appear in
the list.

Manual Grammar Check


The application enable a Grammar Check of a selected passage, the current text chain or the
whole document. When checking the current text chain, the check is made from the position of
the insertion point to the end of the text. It does not matter if the end of the text is visible in
the screen or not.

Start Grammar Check:


- Choose the option GrammarCheck if as well as any unknown strings grammar errors
should also be corrected.
As a grammar error, for example, double spaces will be shown as well as incorrect or missing
punctuation. In the upper area of the dialog grammar, mistakes are displayed in green text in
the context of the current sentence or paragraph.

Automatic Spell and Grammar Check


The application enables the Spell and Grammar Checks to run in the background fully auto-
matically. In this instance spelling errors will be displayed with a red wavy underline. Gram-
matical errors will be displayed with a green wavy underline.

Switch Automatic Spell and Grammar Check on and off:


Do one of the following:

111
Working with Text

- Choose the menu command View > Automatic Spell Check to switch the automatic Spell
Check function on or off.
- Choose the menu command View > Automatic Grammar Check to switch the automatic
Grammar Check function on or off.
- Activate or deactivate the two functions in the Text section of the Preferences.

Correcting errors displayed by automatic Spell and Grammar Check:


1. To correct a spelling error, which is displayed with a red wavy underline, place the insertion
point on the unknown character sequence.
2. Press the right mouse button to display the correction suggestions in the Context menu.
3. Do one of the following:
- Choose a suggestion by clicking it with the mouse. The word will be corrected immediately.
- Choose the command Learn if the unknown character sequence is correct and you want
to take over the character sequence in your personal language dictionary. The new
sequence will be imported into the dictionary for the language that has been assigned to
the character sequence.
- Choose the option Language to change the language in the popup menu if the character
sequence is assigned the wrong language. After this it is possible that the character
sequence will remain underlined and that new suggestions will appear in the Context
menu when it is re-opened.
- Choose the option Spell Check«to open the Spell and Grammar Check dialog for manual
control as previously described.
- Choose the option Correction Hint if you are not sure where the problem lies.

112
Character Map Palette

Character Map Palette


The Character Map Palette gives an overview of all fonts, font weights and
their characters.

With the help of this palette you can:

- Insert single characters of a font into the text.


- Display an overview of a character in all fonts installed on your
computer.
- Display characters in different sizes.
- Check the overall content of a font or font weight.
- Search for single characters in a font.
- Display all the characters of a Unicode range.
- Check the Unicode or UTF-8 value, the Unicode name and the Unicode
range of a character.
- Save frequently used characters as Favorites.
The Character Map Palette is especially helpful if for example you do not know
which characters a font contains or if you work frequently with non-Latin font
systems (e.g. Arabic, Hebrew, Chinese, Japanese, etc.).

Search for and insert characters


Insert single characters of a font into the text
1. Set the cursor to the position where the character is to be inserted.
2. Select the font and font weight required. After selection, all characters available in the
selected font and font weight will be displayed in the palette.
3. Scroll through the palette until the required character is displayed.
4. Select one of the following options to insert a character into the text:
- Double click in the palette on the character that you want to import.
- Alternatively, select the command “Insert Character in Selected Font” in the context
menu.

113
Character Map Palette

Insert single characters from another font variation


1. Set the cursor to the position where the character is to be inserted.
2. Select the font and font weight required. After selection, all characters available in the
selected font and font weight will be displayed in the palette.
3. Scroll through the palette until the required character is displayed.
4. Select a character and wait until all the font variations for the selected character are displayed.
5. Select the required character in the font variation.
6. Select the command Insert Character in Selected Font in the context menu.
Note:
The size of the imported character in the text comes from the text settings and not from the
size displayed in the palette.
Adapt the Character Map Palette
- Use the slider to increase or reduce the displa of the single characters in the palette.
- Select the commands Show Font Variations or Hide Font Variations in the context menu to
display the selected character in different fonts or to hide this display.
- Select the command Hide Font Variations in the context menu to have more space for the
characters in the font selected.

Search for characters in the Character Map Palette


The Character Map Palette has an entry field with which you can make a full text search for spe-
cific characters. The entry field accepts entries of Unicode numbers and Unicode names.
- Select one of the following options to search for a character in the palette:
- Enter a Unicode number in the entry field (e.g. 0041).
- Alternatively, enter a Unicode name in Roman characters in the entry field.
- Enter for example Latin to display all Latin characters.
- Enter for example Latin Capital to display all Latin capital letters.
- Enter for example Latin Capital Letter A to display all variations of the Latin capital A.
- Enter for example Letter A to display all characters whose Unicode name is Letter A (e.g.
Latin A, Hiragana A, Katakana A), whose Unicode name contains Letter A (e.g. the
Hebrew/Arabic character Letter Alef).
- Always press the Enter key to start the search.
- Click the red Close button to remove all entries from the entry field.
- Limit your search using the popup menu Code Charts.
- Select the option Any if you want to display all the characters in a font.
- Select for example the option Arrows if you want to display all Unicode characters in a
font that display arrows.
114
Character Map Palette

- Select for example the option Thai , if you want to display all Unicode characters in a
font that display Thai characters.
Tips and Tricks:
- Place the mouse over the information symbol to establish which font system is supported
by the selected font.
- Place the mouse over the required character to establish which UTF-8 or Unicode value or
Unicode name a character possesses and to which Unicode range a character belongs.
- Select the command Hide Font Variations to switch off the calculation of all the available
font variations, which costs a lot of computing time.

Managing Favorites
You can save frequently used characters as Favorites. In the program a number of characters
have been defined as Favorites (e.g. quotation marks, Copyright symbol, etc.). You can extend
the Favorites list at any time and also remove characters from the Favorites list.

Open Favorites list


1. In the popup menu Code Charts, select the option Favorites to display the Favorites.
2. In the popup menu Code Charts, select the option Any to display all the characters of a font
again.
Note:
In the Favorites list, only those characters will be displayed that are available in the font
selected. Therefore it may occur that additional or fewer Favorites will be displayed when you
change the font.
Save single characters of a font as Favorites
1. In the popup menu Code Charts, select the option Any to display all the characters of a font
again or select another option to limit the list.
2. Scroll through the palette until the required character is displayed.
3. Select the character required.
4. Choose the command Add to Favorites in the context menu.

Remove characters from the Favorites list


1. In the popup menu Code Charts, select the option Favorites to display just the Favorites.
2. Select the character required.
3. Choose the command Remove from Favorites in the context menu.

115
Bullets & Numbering

Bullets & Numbering


Introduction
In a bullet list, each new item or line begins with a special character, usually
known generically as a “bullet”. You can select one of the preset characters
from the list in the popup menu in the Dialog “Bullets and Numbering” or in
the Module Palette (Paragraph tab) or enter a character of your choice (Option
“Custom”). The field in the palette supports the entry of ASCII codes for special
characters (e.g. Alt+1 = ☺). You can also select the level, which allows you to
create a sublist with a different bullet character.

In a numbered list, you can choose the type and format of numbering as well
as the level, which allows you to create a sublist within any list number. You
can add characters in the Prefix and/or Postfix fields in the palette.

Using the levels, you can create a mixed list where for example Level 1 has
numbering and level 2 a bullet character. The exercises in this manual were
created according to this method.

You can apply a Character Style Sheet to take effect on the numbering or spe-
cial character including the Prefix and/or Postfix (e.g. an individual color,
font or style).

You cannot select the bullets or numbers in a list directly. These can only be
changed using the “Bullets and Numbering” dialog or the section of the same
name under the “Paragraph” tab in the Module Palette.

An automatic tab is set between the bullet or numbering and the text. You
can opt to apply standard or personalized tabs using the menu command
“Text > Tabs” or the equivalent options in the section of the same name under
the “Paragraph” tab in the Module Palette.

116
Bullets & Numbering

Applying Bullets to a list


Create a simple bulleted list
1. Create a list to which you want to apply bullets.
2. Place the text cursor in the last line of the list. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the
mouse pointer up so that all lines of the list are at least partially marked.
3. Choose one of the following options:
- Select the menu command Text > Bullets & Numbering.
- Go to the Bullets & Numbering section in the Paragraph tab of the Module Palette.
4. Click the entry Off to open the popup menu Type and choose the option Bullets. The default
setting Dash (002D) will appear and the Dash will be displayed as the list bullet.
5. Confirm your settings by pressing the Return key, or by clicking the OK button in the dialog.

Applying Numbering to a list


Create a simple numbered list
1. Create a list to which you want to apply numbering.
2. Place the text cursor in the last line of the list. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the
mouse pointer up so that all lines of the list are at least partially marked.
3. Choose one of the following options:
- Select the menu command Text > Bullets and Numbering.
- Go to the Bullets & Numbering section in the Paragraph tab of the Module Palette.
4. Click the entry Off to open the popup menu Type and choose the option Numbering. The
default setting will appear and the list will be numbered with the format “1,2,3....”.
5. Confirm your settings by pressing the Return key, or by clicking the OK button in the dialog.

Formatting and personalizing lists


Personalize bulleted list
1. Mark the list as described.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Select a different bullet from the list.
- Select the option Custom in the Character field and enter a character of your choice.
3. Create the Character Style Sheet “Red”, whereby the only option activated in the Style Sheet
is the text color [Red]. For more information on the creation of Style Sheets, please see the
appropriate section of this manual.
117
Bullets & Numbering

4. Mark the list again and select the Style Sheet “Red” from the Style Sheet popup menu.
5. Confirm your settings by pressing the Return key, or by clicking the OK button in the dialog.

Personalize numbered list


1. Mark the list as described above.
2. Select a different numbering format from the popup menu.
3. Create the Character Style Sheet “Red”, whereby the only option activated in the Style Sheet
is the text color (Red). For more information on the creation of Style Sheets, please see the
appropriate section of this manual.
4. Mark the list again and select the new Style Sheet from the popup menu.
5. Confirm your settings by pressing the Return key, or by clicking the OK button in the dialog.
The default Alignment for numbering is Left. You can change this, for example to Right, to
have single digit numbers (1 to 9) placed over the zero (0) of point number 10. With the default
values (e.g. Paragraph Indent = 0 mm) you will not see any difference when you change the
setting. It is therefore necessary to increase the paragraph indent here to a value where the fig-
ures are placed correctly.

Set numbers in numbered list to “Right”


1. Create a numbered list with at least ten items.
2. Mark the list as described above.
3. Go to the field Alignment of the section Bullets & Numbering in the Paragraph tab in the
Module Palette and change the setting from Left to Right.
4. Go to the field Paragraph Indent of the section Indents & Drop Caps in the Paragraph tab in
the Module Palette and enter a value, e.g. 10 pt.
5. Use the arrow buttons on the right of the field to increase or decrease the value until the 1 of
point 10 visibly moves to the right, then go back one click.
6. Confirm your settings by pressing the Return key or by clicking the OK button in the dialog.

118
Bullets & Numbering

Working with lists


If you have more than one list in your document you will find it convenient to use one or more
Style Sheets. If for example all your lists in the document are numbered starting from 1, you can
work in two different ways:
- You can create ONE Style Sheet for a list where the option Continue Numbering is selected.
In this case you will have to right-click the first line of each new list and choose the com-
mand New Numbering from the Context Menu.
- You can create one Style Sheet for the first line/item of the list and a further Style Sheet for
the rest.
It is particularly important to note that the bullet or number at the start of each line/item in the
list will take on the characteristics or attributes of the FIRST character in the line. This means
that if, for example, you give the first character or word in the line a different color from the
rest of the text, then the bullet or list number in this line will also have this color. We will illus-
trate this with a small exercise.

Fix the color of the bullet or number in a list


1. Create a simple list with three items or lines. Here it makes no difference if you select bullets
or numbering for the list.
2. Go to the second line/item in the list, mark the first word and change the color from the
standard [Black] to [Red] in the Module Palette (Character tab). You will see that the number
or bullet has also changed to red.
3. Create the Character Style Sheet Black, where the only attribute is the text color [Black].
4. Mark every line/item in the list as previously described.
5. Choose one of the following options:
- Select the menu command Text > Bullets and Numbering.
- Go to the Bullets & Numbering section in the Paragraph tab of the Module Palette.
6. Click the popup menu Style Sheet to select the Character Style Sheet Black.

119
Bullets & Numbering

Lists with two or more levels


When creating lists with several levels, it is wise to create Style Sheets for each level required. If
your document contains a number of numbered lists of which each will start with the number 1,
you will need two “main” Style Sheets for Level 1. In the following exercise, we will create the
Style Sheets for a numbered list with two levels. Although for a single list only one Style Sheet is
needed for level 1, we will still create two Style Sheets here. If you are in Text mode, please click
the checkbox Based on actual settings to switch it OFF. For more information on the creation of
Style Sheets, please see the appropriate section of this manual.

Create Style Sheets for numbered list


1. Select the menu command Edit > Style Sheets.
2. Click the New button.
3. Choose the name [Numbering] from the popup menu Name. Please click the checkbox Based
on actual settings to switch it OFF if you are in Text mode.
4. Choose the option Paragraph from the popup menu Type and click OK.
5. Apply paragraph and character attributes to the Style Sheet as required.
6. Go to the Bullets & Numbering section and choose the option Numbering from the popup
menu Type.
7. Choose the option Begin New Numbering from the popup menu Mode.
8. Leave all the other settings as they are and enter a point (full stop) in the Postfix field.
9. Repeat points 2 to 4. The program will create the new Style Sheet [Numbering 2] automatically.
10. In the newly created Style Sheet [Numbering 2], go to the Info section and choose the option
[Numbering] from the popup menu Template in the General section (top right).
11. Go to the Bullets & Numbering section and choose the option Continue Numbering from the
popup menu Mode.
12. Enter a point (full stop) in the Postfix field. Do NOT click the OK button!
13. Repeat points 2 to 4, and create the new Style Sheet [Numbering 3].
14. In the newly created Style Sheet [Numbering 3], go to the Info section and choose the option
[Numbering 2] from the popup menu Template in the General section (top right).
15. Go to the Bullets & Numbering section and choose the option Bullets from the popup menu
Type.
16. Leave the Character as Dash (002D) and enter 2 in the Level field.
17. Leave the other settings as they are and click the OK button at the bottom right of the dialog.

120
Bullets & Numbering

Apply different Style Sheets to List


1. Create a numbered list with at least five items, where at least two items will be level 2.
2. Click the mouse in the first item on the list and choose the Style Sheet [Numbering] in the
Style Sheets Palette.
3. Mark the rest of the list as previously described and choose the Style Sheet [Numbering 2] in
the Style Sheets Palette.
4. Mark the two level 2 items and choose the Style Sheet [Numbering 3] in the Style Sheets
Palette.
The Result should appear similar to the list below:
1. Point 1
2. Point 2
- Point 2 Level 2 a
- Point 2 Level 2 b
3. Point 3
Tip:
The exercises in this manual were created using the method described above.
- You can, for example, apply a left (text) indent to the Style Sheet [Numbering 3] so that
the items with this Style Sheet are indented for a better effect. You can of course extend
this principle with more Style Sheets/Levels.
- If you have two or more lists in a text chain, whereby the body text separates the lists
from one another, then you will certainly need two Style Sheets for level 1 as described
above, otherwise the numbering will be continued from list to list. If you do require the
numbering in your lists to be continuous, then you do not need the second Style Sheet.

Tips and Tricks for Bullets and Numbering Lists


1. When creating/editing tabs, activate the checkbox Apply as Indent, so that the text is left
indented on the tab.
2. Always work with Style Sheets as these will save you a lot of time.
3. Work out in advance how many and which types of list styles you need in your document
and create all the Style Sheets before you start editing.
4. If you are creating a document where you are using a specific style for index entries (in this
manual index entries are colored red), you wil always need a Character Style Sheet for the
number or bullet. The reason for this is that if you apply the index style to the first character
in the first word, that style will also be applied to the bullet or number of the list.

121
Footnotes and Endnotes

Footnotes and Endnotes


Footnotes and Endnotes are notes relating to a text, but which are not placed
in the body text in order to increase its legibility. The Footnote or Endnote
contains additional explanations of the main text, such as legends, notes,
sources for quotes etc., which can be quite extensive. Footnotes and Endnotes
consist of a reference character in the body text and the Footnote or Endnote
text. The Footnote text generally appears at the end of the text area or the
chapter, Endnotes at the end of the chapter or the main text, whereby the
Footnote/Endnote Label (character or number) is repeated before the appro-
priate text.

The program offers extensive functions for the entry, management and dis-
play of Footnotes and Endnotes. Below is a short overview:

- An unlimited number of Footnotes and Endnotes can be applied in a


document.
- Footnotes and Endnotes are numbered automatically by the program.
The numbering changes automatically as soon as Footnotes or End-
notes are inserted or deleted.
- The numbering of Footnotes and Endnotes can follow per document or
chapter.
- Style Sheets can be assigned to Footnotes and Endnotes both manually
and automatically.
- Endnotes can be output at the end of the body text or at the end of the
chapter.
- Footnotes can be displayed at the foot of the text object, the text column
or at the end of the layout.
- Footnotes and Endnotes can be displayed independently of the body
text in several columns and with a separator line.
- Footnote labels can be extended with a text that is displayed in front of
and/or after the Footnote label (Prefix and Postfix).

122
Footnotes and Endnotes

Preparations for Footnotes and Endnotes


Preferences for Footnotes and Endnotes
Before you start creating Footnotes and Endnotes, you should make a few preparations:
1. Create Paragraph Style Sheets for the Footnote Text or Endnote Text as well as Character Style
Sheets for the Footnote Reference or Endnote Reference and the Footnote Label or Endnote
Label. When creating the Style Sheets, please apply the following rules:
- Footnotes or Endnotes are ideally displayed in a font size that is one or two points
smaller than the body text.
- So as not to change the type color of the page, the Line Spacing of the body text and the
Footnote Text or Endnote Text should be identical.
- The Footnote Reference or Endnote Reference in the body text should be displayed in
Superscript. In the Footnote Text or Endnote Text however, the Footnote Label or Endnote
Label character should not be in Superscript, because otherwise the legibility will be lost
due to the smaller type.
2. Define the layout of the Footnotes and Endnotes in the Preferences. Subsequent changes in
the Preferences only take effect on new text chains or new footnotes and endnotes. Changes
for existing text objects and their text chains can be made using the Module palette.
3. Define the Position of the Footnotes and the number of columns for them in the text object
settings.

Define Preferences for Footnotes and Endnotes:


1. Select the Preferences option in the Edit menu (Windows/Linux) or the VivaDesigner menu
(Mac OS).
2. Choose the Text option.
3. Choose the following options in the dialog section Footnote Style Sheets:
- Choose the Character Style Sheets for the Footnote Reference and the Footnote Label and
the Paragraph Style Sheet for the Footnote Text.
4. Choose the following options in the dialog section Endnote Style Sheets:
- choose the Character Style Sheets for the Endnote Reference and the Endnote Label and
the Paragraph Style Sheet for the Endnote Text.
5. Choose the following options in the dialog section Footnotes:
- Use the entry field Text Offset to define the minimum offset between the body text and
the Footnote Text.
- Use the entry fields Prefix and Postfix to define if and which character(s) should be
inserted before and/or after the Footnote Reference and the Footnote Label.
- Use the popup menu Format to define how the Footnote Reference and the Footnote Label
should be displayed.

123
Footnotes and Endnotes

- Use the popup menu Numbering to define if the numbering should be continuous or
chapter-wise. With the option chapter-wise the numbering starts from the beginning as
soon as a chapter break (New Chapter) is inserted in the text. (See the section Insert Vari-
able).
- Use the popup menu Separator to define if a separator should be displayed between the
body text and the footnote text.
- Use the optional entry fields Vertical Offset and Horizontal Indent to define the position
of the separator. Both positive and negative values are allowed.
- Use the additional options Line Width, Color, Line Style and Length to define the display
of the Separator.
In the entry field Length absolute values (e.g. 100 mm) and relative values (e.g. 50%) are
allowed. Relative values relate to the width of the text object. With multi-column text objects
the value relates to the width of a text column.
6. Choose the following additional options in the dialog section Endnotes:
- Use the popup menu Display Position to define if the Endnote at the end should be dis-
played After the Related Text, In a new Text Column or In a new Text Object.
- Use the entry field Text Offset to define the minimum offset between the body text and
the Endnote Text.
- Use the popup menu Save to if the Endnotes should be displayed at End of Text or End of
Chapter.
- Define the additional options Prefix, Postfix, Format, Numbering and Separator in the
same way as the settings for footnotes.

124
Footnotes and Endnotes

Footnote Position
For every text object in a text chain, you can define how the footnotes should be positioned.
This is particularly helpful if the positioning for left and right hand pages is different. In this
way you can for example define that for a two-column text object the footnote should be in the
right hand column on the left hand page and the left hand column on the right hand page.

Define the Footnote Position:


1. Select the text object in which the Footnotes are to be displayed. In new documents with an
automatic text object, select the text object on the appropriate Alias Page.
2. Choose the option Special iin the Object menu or in the context menu.
3. Select the Header & Footer tab.
4. Define the following options in the Footnotes section:
- Use the popup menu Position to define the position of the footnotes:
- Choose the Layout option if the footnotes should be displayed at the end of the Layout. If
the body text contains no Layout Break, the footnotes will be displayed in the same way
as with the option On every text column. If the body text flows over several text object
columns, it may be that some footnotes will be displayed in the previous text object col-
umns and some at the end of the Layout.
- Choose the option On every text column, if the footnotes should be displayed at the end
of every text column.
- Choose the option On text frame if the footnotes should be displayed at the end of a text
object. With multi-column text objects the footnotes will always be output in the first
column.
- Use the entry fields Number of columns and Gutter to define the number of footnote col-
umns within a text object column and their gutter.
- Use the entry field Start from column to define from which text object column the foot-
notes should be displayed. This option can only be selected when the text object has
more than one column.
- Use the entry field Width to define the width of the footnotes depending on the number
of text object columns. This option can only be selected when the text object has more
than one column.

125
Footnotes and Endnotes

Working with Footnotes and Endnotes


Inserting Footnotes and Endnotes
After completing the preparations for the footnotes and endnotes, you can now begin inserting
them.

Insert Footnotes and Endnotes:


1. Position the Cursor at the point where the reference character for the footnote or endnote
should be inserted.
2. Choose the option Footnote or Endnote in the menu Text > Insert Character > Insert Variable
or in the context menu Insert Variable.
The number for the footnote or endnote will be inserted at the cursor position, and the Style
Sheet that was defined in the Preferences will be applied to it. At the same time, the footnote or
endnote number (label) followed by a default footnote or endnote text will be inserted (in the
predefined position), and the Style Sheet that was defined in the Preferences will be applied to
them. You can now overwrite the footnote or endnote text and replace it with your own.

Convert Footnotes and Endnotes


Footnotes and endnotes can be converted at any time.

Convert Footnotes and Endnotes:


1. Position the Cursor exactly in front of the Footnote number or Endnote number (reference) in
the body text.
2. Choose the option Note Settings in the context menu.
3. In the popup menu Type, define whether the number is a Footnote or an Endnote.
4. If you still have the default note text (“Footnote text” or “Endnote text”) showing in the
lower section of the dialog, it is advisable to change it accordingly.
5. Complete your settings with OK.

Automatic Numbering
All footnotes and endnotes are numbered automatically. If you insert a new footnote or end-
note in the body text, the program checks whether there are additional footnotes or endnotes
before and after, and changes the numbering of the footnotes and endnotes according to the
preferences set.
You can switch the automatic numbering for individual footnotes or endnotes on or off. This
can be helpful if you want to insert a footnote or endnote that should not be counted with the
others or if all footnote or endnote references consist of a character (e.g. *). Such exceptions
are often used if the footnote contains a reference to the author of the article or if very few
footnotes are used in the whole body text.

126
Footnotes and Endnotes

Switch off Automatic Numbering:


1. Position the Cursor exactly in front of the Footnote number or Endnote number (reference) in
the body text.
2. Choose the option Note Settings in the context menu.
3. Choose the option No in the popup menu Numbering if you want to enter a manual number
or an appropriate character for the footnote or endnote.
4. Enter the required character(s) in the Custom Text field. As default the program shows an
asterisk (*).
5. Complete your settings with OK.
You can change this setting at any time and switch the automatic numbering on again.

Switch on Automatic Numbering:


1. Position the Cursor exactly in front of the Footnote number or Endnote number (reference) in
the body text.
2. Choose the option Note Settings in the context menu.
3. Choose the option Yes in the popup menu Numbering if the footnote or endnote should be
numbered automatically.
4. Complete your settings with OK.

Deleting Footnotes and Endnotes

Delete Footnotes and Endnotes:


- Delete the Footnote Reference or Endnote Reference number in the body text.
- Alternatively, delete the Footnote Text or Endnote Text AND the Footnote Label or End-
note Label (number).
The footnote and the Footnote Reference will then be deleted automatically. If necessary, the
footnotes and/or endnotes will be renumbered.

127
Footnotes and Endnotes

General Tips for Footnotes and Endnotes


- Deleting or overwriting The Footnote Label or Endnote Label has no influence on the num-
bering.
- Overwriting the Footnote Reference or Endnote Reference causes the connection to the
automatic numbering to be lost.
- Overwriting the Footnote Reference or Endnote Reference in the body text automatically
deletes the footnote or endnote.
- If you choose the option Select All in the footnote text, all the footnotes in the current text
column will be selected.
- When using the command Cut in the body text for text containing a footnote or endnote,
the Footnote Text and/or the Endnote Text will be cut with it and copied to the Clipboard.
If you paste text containing a footnote or endnote, the Footnote Text and/or the Endnote
Text will be pasted with it.
- You can copy footnote or endnote text to other footnotes or endnotes as well as to the
body text.
- In a footnote or endnote text it is not possible to insert a footnote, an endnote or a chapter
break. Although it is possible to insert a layout column break, a text object break or a lay-
out break, this is not recommended for technical reasons.
- Only the whole footnote or endnote text may be displayed.
- Breaking footnote or endnote text is not possible. If a footnote or endnote text cannot be
displayed completely in a text column, the footnote and/or endnote text including the line
in the body text that contains the footnote or end note reference will be broken to the next
column or the next text object. If this is not possible, a text overflow will be displayed
(providing you have activated the guide lines with the shortcut keys Ctrl + L (Windows/
Linux) or Command + L (Mac).
- Column settings for Layouts are not valid for footnote or endnote text.
- Column settings for footnotes can only be defined for the text object.

128
Working with Pictures
Working with Pictures

Working with Pictures


A picture is worth a thousand words. This ancient saying indicates the impor-
tance of images in a document. This is precisely why a layout program must
be able to handle images with the same ease as text.

Poor images will not be improved by using this application. But, providing no
mistakes are made, this is also true the other way around.

Before we describe how to create Picture objects and import images in depth,
we think it is useful first to introduce some basic concepts of computer images
and image formats.

This knowledge may potentially save not only the amateur, but also the prac-
tised professional much time, trouble and money. If you feel comfortable with
the various image formats, you can ignore the following section and proceed
with the paragraph Creating picture objects.

Raster or Vector Images


In computer images there is a basic difference between raster images and vector images, also
known as pixel and object images. Put simply, you can say that photographs taken with a digital
camera are saved as pixel images, and such items as company logos are usually saved as vector
images.
A raster image with a size of 300 by 300 means this images is represented by 300 pixels in both
the horizontal and vertical direction. Unfortunately it is not possible to calculate the size of the
image in millimeters or inches on the basis of this information, as it is not known how many
dots or pixels occur in a unit length. This depends on the resolution of the image.
The resolution of a raster image is defined by the number of pixels per inch or centimeter. The
common measurement unit for images is DPI, or dots per inch.
An image with 72 by 72 pixels and a resolution of 72 dpi has a physical size of 1 square inch.This
is naturally a very low resolution, as generally resolutions for raster images range from 144 dpi
to 600 dpi, and even up to several thousand dpi.
The quality of a raster image is further specified by the Color Depth. This Color Depth defines
the number of available colors that a pixel may have. Simple raster images contain a single bit
per pixel which represents either black or white. Pictures with a Color Depth of 2 bits per pixel
allow 4 (22) different colors. A Color Depth of 16 Bits allows up to 65,536 (216) different colors.
Resolution and Color Depth or bit-depth are directly related. An image with a resolution of 300
dpi and a bit-depth of 8 bits may be of poorer quality than an image with a bit-depth of 16
bits and a 200 dpi resolution.
130
Working with Pictures

The enlargement factor of raster images is also problematic. If a raster image with a resolution
of 72 DPI is enlarged by 200% the image resolution decreases to 36 dpi. If the image is reduced
50% the resolution increases to 144 dpi. The amount of pixels never changes when scaling the
picture.
By contrast to raster images, vector images do not save their image information as individual
pixels but as a collection of command chains.
While with a bitmap image graphic forms consist of thousands of pixels, vector image formats
only store information about drawing the image and its attributes (line weight, color, etc.).
Vector graphics can be created with an illustration program. VivaDesigner also stores its
information about graphic elements such as objects, frames, lines and texts as vector informa-
tion.
With these commands any lines, curves or text may be drawn. The advantage of vector images
compared to bitmap images is that vector information is much more efficient in storage than
pixel images.
The main advantage however, is the resolution independence of vector images. The command
to draw a circle can be drawn at the maximum resolution supported by the output device, and
is not limited by the amount of pixels.
This means you do not need to worry about the resolution or re-scaling of a vector image(e.g.
200%).

Commonly used image formats


There are hundreds of different image formats. In the professional publishing field the TIFF, EPS
and PDF image formats play a dominant role. Other formats like JPEG, or the Scitex CT format
are becoming more popular. To be able to assess which format is best for which document, you
need to have some background knowledge. We will therefore examine these formats in more
detail.
Generally you can recognise image formats by their suffixes.

Raster Image Formats

The TIFF Format


This format for raster images is very versatile and supports bit depth of 1 to 48 bits per pixel. At
the same time it supports different color models; black and white, gray scale, RGB, CIE, RGB
indexed colors and CMYK. Which color model is the right one depends on what additional work
will be done with the image. We will go into this in more detail later. The TIFF format supports
various compression methods like RLE, LZW, CCITT Group 3 and 4, and JPEG. CCITT-compression
is mostly used for transmitting images on fax machines. The desktop publishing environment
mainly uses the LZW and JPEG processes.
The TIFF format differs between images for Motorola and Intel processors. These formats are fre-
quently called Macintosh or IBM PC format. VivaDesigner supports both variations. Images in
TIFF format have the suffix .tif or .tiff. On Mac OS X VivaDesigner recognizes an image in TIFF
format even if it has no suffix.
131
Working with Pictures

The JPEG format


This platform-crossing format for raster images was developed in 1992 by the Joint Photographic
Experts Group (JPEG). What (in the jargon) is called the JPEG file format is actually the JFIF file
format, which stands for JPEG File Interchange Format. As a suffix usually .jpg (more seldom:
.jpeg or .jpe) or .jfif is used. The JPEG format is the most commonly used image format in the
Internet and in digital cameras. The advantage of the JPEG format lies in its high compression
rate, which however is not without losses. This means that the higher the compression rate, the
greater is the loss in quality. Therefore professional digital cameras store their images in either
JPEG or in loss-free, but storage-intensive RAW format. For this reason the JPEG format is only
suitable for color output of high quality layouts in a very limited way.
If possible, raster images in JPEG format should be converted to TIFF or EPS formats with the
CMYK color model.
You can however freely use JPEG images if:
- the document output will be exclusively for the monitor.
- the output is to be made on a laser printer or copier.
- a color output in exclusively composite mode is made.
If you are planning a high quality output, you should where possible avoid using JPEG images.
Should this not be possible, you should observe the following rules:
- Use JPEG images only for screenshots.
- Ensure that color raster images are supplied not in RGB, but in CMYK format. This informa-
tion is supplied after image import by the Module palette or the Picture Usage. The RGB
color model has a much larger spectrum than CMYK, but RGB colors must be converted into
CMYK colors (print colors) for a color separation.
- If you or your service provider have a modern RIP, which can convert RGB data perfectly to
CMYK colors, you should ensure that you use a low compression to minimise quality losses.
- Ensure that the JPEG images have a resolution of 300DPI, insofar as the size of the image is
not reduced.

The BMP format


Windows Bitmap, BMP for short, is a file format for raster images that was developed by Micro-
soft for the operating systems Windows and OS/2 and was introduced with Windows 3.0. The
suffix is .bmp, occasionally .dib. Like the JPEG format, the BMP format is only suitable for
professional output in a very limited way. If possible, raster images in BMP format should be
converted to TIFF or EPS formats with the CMYK color model.
You can however freely use BMP images if:
- the document output will be exclusively for the monitor.
- the output is to be made on a laser printer or copier.
- a color output in exclusively composite mode is made.
If you are planning a high quality output, you should where possible avoid using BMP images.
Should this not be possible, you should only use BMP images for screenshots.
132
Working with Pictures

The PNG format


The PNG format (PNG stands for Portable Network Graphics) is a plat-form-crossing format for
raster images. By contrast to the JPEG format the data is saved without losses and may contain
transparency information. Despite this, the PNG format is not suitable for a professional output
due to it being limited to the RGB color model. If possible, you should convert raster images in
PNG format to TIFF or EPS formats with the CMYK color model.
You can however freely use PNG images if:
- the document output will be exclusively for the monitor.
- the output is to be made on a laser printer or copier.
- a color output in exclusively composite mode is made.
If you are planning a high quality output, you should where possible avoid using PNG images.
Should this not be possible, you should only use PNG images for screenshots.

The SCITEX formats


The application supports three image formats developed by SCITEX Corp., namely the CT (Con-
tinuous Tone) format, the LW (Linework) format and the BM (Bitmap) format.
The CT-format was developed for maximum performance on SCITEX RIPS and exposure devices.
The format is a highly compressed bitmap format, containing color-separated data, optimized
for SCITEX proprietary hardware devices.
The BM-format is a simple 256 pixel per bit screen format. This format may also contain color-
separated data. BM files are typically very compact.
The LW-format is ideally suited to black-and-white line-art scans for instance. Since it basic-
ally contains only two colors very large scans may be highly compressed and efficiently stored.

Vector Image Formats


The EPS Format
The EPS format is the most commonly used vector file format in the publishing field.
We differ between the actual EPS format (Encapsulated PostScript) with the suffix .eps and the
extended EPSF format for Macintosh with the suffix .epsf, which contains an integrated image
preview as a resource.
So that the commands to create an image on the printer for the monitor do not have to be pre-
pared again, some vector formats save a preview of the vector image. This preview displays a
Bitmap in 72 DPI resolution which symbolises the commands or elements of the file.
The special feature of PostScript format lies in the fact that, it can contain not only vector
graphics but also raster information (as with TIFF or PICT-format). Due to the simple and brief
commands even for complex graphics there is also a higher printing speed for EPS images,
since for example in the printing of a circle not all the points in the circle, but just the com-
mand to draw a circle is sent to the printer. Therefore a vector-oriented EPS is also completely
independent of the resolution of the output device.
133
Working with Pictures

The advantage of a high printing speed disappears when only a small part of an EPS image is
printed. While with different Bitmap formats in part only the visible section of the image is sent
to the printer, the program always has to transfer the whole EPS file. This is because it has no
intelligence to know which part(s) of the image make up the visible crop.
Another advantage of the EPS-format is the support of transparency. While vector images
always support transparency, the unique thing about EPS is that it also supports transparency
for raster images under certain conditions.

The EPS/DCS Format


A particular instance of the EPS format is the DCS format (Desktop Color Separation). This for-
mat is especially suited to fast color separation of EPS images and is available in two versions.
With the DCS 1.0 format an image consists of five files, a so-called Layout file consisting of a
preview and references to the other four files, which contain the appropriate CMYK representa-
tions of the EPS.
With the DCS 2.0 format an image consists of one file, which contains all the color separations
pre-separated.
DCS images also have advantages and disadvantages. The advantage of the DCS format is the
speed with which color separations can be printed. Also the DCS-1 format allows you to distrib-
ute the layout file for presentation purposes while data integrity is maintained since the pre-
view cannot be printed with the needed high resolution without the 4 corresponding data files.
A disadvantage of using the DCS format when outputting to color printers for proofing is that
most desktop printers do not allow you to print in CMYK format. In this case the program out-
puts the layout file as on a laser printer.

The PDF Format


The PDF format is a document format that can save any text and images in a high quality, and
which may be displayed on and output from every operating system in high quality. Although
PDF format is not a classical image format, VivaDesigner can import PDF files into picture
objects and output them accordingly.

OPI Images
The so-called OPI images present a special feature in the use of image formats. OPI stands for
Open Press Interface and was developed in the nineties to reduce the data mass for images
when working with layout programs. OPI images are not created by an image or photographic
program, but by a so-called OPI server. This server creates low resolution versions of images in
TIFF or EPS format in the form von Layout images. The OPI server creates for example from a
20MB TIFF or EPS file an 800KB layout image. A layout image receives the same file name when it
is created. According to the server settings the layout image may receive the suffix of the high
resolution original (also .eps or .tiff) or the suffix .lay. Technically we are still dealing with
images in TIFF or EPS format, which however possess an additional commentary with the name
and path of the high resolution file. The much smaller layout images can be imported very
quickly and save memory space. In the print output later you can specify in the program if this
commentary should be included in the output, so that the OPI server can later replace the lay-
out images with the high resolution original data.
134
Working with Pictures

EPSF Vector Images and Fonts


While text is saved in raster images as a collection of pixels, the EPS format is able to save the
text and its properties as a format reference in vector images.
In order to print the text of a vector image correctly, most programs offer the possibility of
embedding the fonts used directly in the vector image (EPS or PDF). Some programs also offer
the possibility of converting the fonts used into outline paths (objects). You should only use
this option when embedding the fonts is not possible.
If fonts are not embedded or converted into outline paths, this can lead to output problems. In
this case the user must ensure that the fonts used are installed and possess exactly the same
names.
To address this problem the application shows a Font Usage, which also lists fonts needed by
imported EPS image files. Without this special Font Usage facility it would be hard for the user
to verify if fonts may be missing, which might cause problems during printing.
This is because the preview of the picture is saved as a Bitmap where type is normally displayed
as a collection of pixels. Therefore the user, in contrary to normal text in the VIVA-document,
cannot realize that the font used in the EPS might not be available.
For further explanation of this dialog please see the section entitled Font Usage.

Vector Images and Colors


When an EPS vector image is imported which contains colors not defined in the current docu-
ment, the colors will automatically be added to the available colors. Adding means that the
application will take over the color name, the color definition and also the color separation
mode.
Colors that are taken into the color list through importing an EPS file can be edited with the
menu Edit/Colors, but these changes only affect objects that use these colors, but not the EPS
file which also contains the color.
Colors that are taken into the color list through importing an EPS file will remain in the color list
even if the EPS file that contains these colors has already been deleted from the document. Colors
that are taken into the color list from an EPS file can only be deleted when the appropriate EPS
file is no longer used in the document and also when other objects in the document do not use
this color.
For further explanation of this dialog please see the section entitled Color Usage.

135
Working with Pictures

Creating Picture Objects


VivaDesigner is an object-oriented typesetting and layout program. This means that as with
text, images are always displayed in closed picture objects. For this reason, a picture object
must be created before the required picture is imported. The picture will be displayed within
this object.
1. Picture objects may have any arbitrary form as long as they are closed objects.
2. A new picture object is created by means of the closed object tools in Toolbar, or with short-
cut keys or menu commands.

Create a new picture object interactively:


1. Choose one of the following options:
- Click in the Tool palette on the Picture Object Tool.
- Click on the arrow to the right of the tool and select a form to create your picture object.
2. Click on the document page and create the picture object.
It may be quicker if you create a picture object using the menu or shortcut keys.

Create a new picture object with menu/shortcut keys:


1. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Shift + B (Windows/Linux) or Command + Shift + B (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > Content > Picture.
You can also create a picture object by converting another closed object to a picture object.
If you change a graphic object into a picture object the conversion will be immediate. However
if a text object is changed into a picture object an alert message may appear warning you that
the text will be lost.

Convert an existing object into a picture object:


1. Choose an existing closed object.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Shift + B (Windows/Linux) or Command + Shift + B (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > Content > Picture.
- Choose the command Content > Picture in the Context menu.
After the creation of the picture object a diagonal cross will appear, indicating the picture
object is empty.

136
Working with Pictures

Summary Creating Picture Objects


- Picture objects can be created by using the Toolbar Object tools.
- Picture objects can be created automatically using the shortcut keys Ctrl + Shift + B (Win-
dows/Linux) or Command + Shift + B (Mac) or with the menu command Object > Content >
Picture, as long as no other object is selected.
- Picture objects can be created by converting other object types.

Image Mode
Activate/Leave Image Mode
To import an image or position an imported image you will need to enable the Picture mode.
As you already know the mouse pointer will automatically change into the appropriate pointer
for the specific object type.
When the mouse pointer is positioned over a picture object it will change into the grabber
pointer.

Activate Picture mode:


Click with the mouse on the surface of a picture object.
- After the picture mode is selected by clicking in the object:
- The Picture menu will appear.
- The Module palette in Picture mode will appear if it was not specifically hidden.
- The object frame will be highlighted.This imaginary frame shows at which point the
mouse pointer will change into the object pointer with which you can select and move
the object itself.
- Hollow handles will appear. These handles indicate that Picture mode is activated and
where the mouse pointer will change into the sizing pointer through which the object can
be resized.
Note:
To select a picture object which is part of a group of objects without ungrouping all the
objects, the Group Mode must be deativated. Click anywhere on the page where there is no
Object to activate Object mode and choose the menu command Object > Group Mode Active or
press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + U (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + U (Mac).
Ways of leaving Picture Mode:
- If the picture mode is enabled and the mouse pointer is positioned on a handle it will
change into the sizing pointer. If the mouse button is held down the object can be
resized. The program will then change to Object mode.
- Click anywhere in the document where no object is present.
- Hold down the Ctrl key (Windows/Linux) or the Command key (Mac) while clicking the
137 object.
Working with Pictures

Importing Pictures
You can import pictures using a selection dialog, interactively with Drag and Drop or with the
Clipboard.

The Import Command


You can import pictures (images or illustrations) using the import dialog. The program opens
its own dialog as the default for picture import, which is identical for all operating systems.
You already know the operation of this dialog from previous chapters.

Import picture with the dialog:


1. Choose or create a picture object and activate the Picture Mode.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + E (Windows/Linux) or Command + E (Mac).
- Choose the menu command File > Import.
- Choose the command Import in the Context menu.
3. Set the required display of folders and files using the options familiar to you.
4. Use the many navigation assistants to select the folder in which your picture file is stored.
5. Choose the picture file with the mouse pointer or enter the name of the picture file in the
entry field File Name.
6. You may select an option in the popup menu File Type to limit the display of picture files.
7. You may click the OS Dialog button if you prefer to work directly with the operating system
of your computer (OS = Operating System).
8. Click the Open button when you want to import the picture file you have selected.
The imported picture files will not be fully imported. While importing a picture with the Import
command the picture will not be embedded in the document. The program just saves a pre-
view, the picture name and the required path. This keeps the size of the document within rea-
sonable bounds.
The imported pictures have to be opened to produce the preview, then closed again so they
may be modified again immediately by other users in a network when necessary.
If you import an image in a picture object that already contains an image it will take on the
current attributes applied to the previous image. If you have modified the position or the scaling
factor of the previous picture, these parameters will automatically be applied to the new one.
If you want to import a picture into an empty picture object with certain special properties, the
parameters should be set in the Picture palette beforehand.

138
Working with Pictures

Drag and Drop


Drag and Drop is a well-known technique with which you can move files and folders in the
operating system. You can use the mouse to import pictures directly from the Desktop or a
folder in the operating system.

Import pictures to existing picture objects with Drag and Drop:


1. Open the folder in the operating system.
- Make sure that both the icon of the picture file and the picture frame in the document
window are visible.
2. Click the picture file icon and with the mouse button held down, drag it over the picture
frame in the document window.
3. Release the mouse button to import the picture into the picture object.
You can also use the Drag and Drop function to import a picture and at the same time create a
new picture object. Simply drag the picture file to the document page and release it. The pic-
ture will be imported in an object with a default size determined by the program, and you can
then edit the picture and object settings in the usual way. With this method you can also
import a number of pictures simultaneously.

Import several pictures with Drag and Drop:


1. Open the folder in the operating system.
2. Mark the picture files you want to import and with the mouse button held down, drag them
to the document page.
3. Release the mouse button to import the pictures. The program will import and display them
in a default size determined by the program according to the number of pictures imported.

Clipboard
You can import pictures using the Clipboard of different programs. The clipboard is a memory
area that the operating system provides for the exchange of data between various programs. If
a picture or text is copied to the clipboard, other programs can import (paste) this data into
their documents.
By contrast to the Import command, the imported picture is embedded in the document, since
there is no file which the program could refer to during output. Therefore pictures imported via
the clipboard only have a screen resolution and are therefore not suitable for high quality
printing.

Deleting, Cutting and Copying Image Content


There are two ways to delete the content of a picture object. You can delete the picture and
leave an empty picture object, or you can import another picture into the same picture object.
To cut or copy the content of a picture object to another picture object, use the well-known
commands Cut, Copy and Paste.
139
Working with Pictures

Deleting/Cutting/Replacing picture content:


1. Activate Picture Mode.
2. Choose one of the following options to delete an image:
- Press the Backspace or Delete key.
- Choose the menu command Edit > Delete.
- Choose the command Delete in the Context menu.
3. Choose one of the following options to cut an image when you want to paste the image into
another picture object:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl-X (Windows/Linux) or Command + X (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Edit > Cut.
- Choose the command Cut in the Context menu.
4. Choose one of the following options to replace an image:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + E (Windows/Linux) or Command + E (Mac).
- Choose the menu command File > Import.
- Choose the menu command Import in the Context Menu.

Copy & Paste picture content:


1. Activate the Picture Mode in the picture object you want to copy.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + C (Windows/Linux) or Command + C (Mac).
- Choose the menu command File > Copy.
- Choose the command Copy in the Context menu.
3. Activate the Picture Mode in the picture object into which you want to paste the picture.
4. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Control-V (Windows/Linux) or Command + V (Mac).
- Choose the menu command File > Paste.
- Choose the command Paste in the Context menu.

140
Working with Pictures

Defining the Crop


As long as there are no preference properties set for a picture object an imported picture will
be placed in the upper left corner of the picture object. However you may move the picture in
the picture object in any desired direction. To do so there are several options:
- Interactive moving with the mouse/grabber hand.
- Interactive moving with the arrow keys.
- Precise positioning by means of parameter entrances in the Picture palette.
- Precise positioning by centering the picture in the picture object.
- Skewing and rotating the picture.
- Resizing the picture object.

Moving Picture Content


The picture can be moved and aligned with the mouse/grabber hand, with the arrow keys or
with menu commands. In the default settings the picture preview will be displayed when the
picture is moved in the picture object. The preview is also shown with a frame to help with
positioning.

Move picture content interactively:


1. Activate Picture Mode.
2. Hold down the mouse button (Mac) or the left mouse button (Windows/Linux) and drag the
picture in any direction.
- Hold down the the Shift key to constrain the movement to 90 degrees horizontal/vertical.
3. Instead of the mouse, use the arrow keys to move the picture.
In all the cases described above, the current position of the preview will be displayed immedi-
ately in the Module palette (in Picture mode).
4. Alternatively, use the entry fields in the Module palette to define the top left hand position
of the preview in the picture frame. Both positive and negative values may be entered in all
units of measurement.
While moving the image interactively with the mouse/grabber hand or with the arrow keys, the
actual position is displayed immediately. This may slow down the speed of the program but
undoubtedly it enhances your control over the work.
The speed and display quality when moving pictures can be defined in the Document Preferences
for Pages & Objects.

Display options for moving pictures:


1. Choose the option Pages & Objects in the Preferences.
2. Choose one of the following options in the popup menu Move Image Content:

141
Working with Pictures

- Choose the option Gray out images, when only a (blue) frame instead of a preview
should be displayed when moving a picture. This option is suitable for very slow com-
puters.
- Choose the option Show preview in frame, when the preview should be displayed when
moving a picture. This option is activated as default.
- Choose the option Show complete preview, when the complete preview should be displayed
when moving a picture. This option is suitable for very precise picture positioning, and is
intended for very fast computers.
3. Click OK to close the dialog.
If when moving picture content you wait for a second with the mouse, the picture preview will
flicker briefly. This is a signal to the user that the program has temporarily changed the display
mode for the current movement of the picture:
- If in the Preferences the option Move Image Content has been activated, the program
behaves temporarily as if the option Show Preview in Frame has been selected.
- If in the Preferences the option Show Image Size has been activated, the program
behaves temporarily as if the option Show Complete Preview has been selected.
You can also move or align the picture preview using menu commands.

Move picture preview using menu:


1. Choose one of the following options to centre the picture horizontally and vertically in the
Picture object:
- Press the shortcut keys Control-Shift + M (Windows/Linux) or Command + Shift + M (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Picture > Alignment > Center.
- Choose the command Center in the Context menu.
2. Choose one of the following options to align the picture horizontally on the left edge of the
Picture object:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl-Shift + G (Windows/Linux) or Command + Shift + G (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Picture > Alignment > Left.
- Choose the command Alignment > Left in the Context Menu.
3. Choose one of the following options to align the picture horizontally on the right edge of the
Picture object:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Shift + R (Windows/Linux) or Command + Shift + R (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Picture > Alignment > Right.
- Choose the command Alignment > Right in the Context Menu.
4. Choose one of the following options to center the picture horizontally in the Picture object:
- Choose the menu command Picture > Alignment > Center Horizontally.
- Choose the command Alignment > Center Horizontally in the Context menu.
142
Working with Pictures

5. Choose one of the following options to align the picture vertically on the top edge of the
Picture object:
- Choose the menu command Picture > Alignment > Top.
- Choose the command Alignment > Top in the Context Menu.
6. Choose one of the following options to align the picture vertically on the bottom edge of the
Picture object:
- Choose the menu command Picture > Alignment > Bottom.
- Choose the command Alignment > Bottom in the Context menu.
7. Choose one of the following options to center the picture vertically in the Picture object:
- Choose the menu command Picture > Alignment > Center Vertically.
- Choose the command Alignment > Center Vertically in the Context Menu.
When the image is centered in the object, an absolute value is calculated that does not change
when the height or width of the Picture object is changed.

Move picture preview precisely with the dialog:


1. Choose a Picture object.
2. Choose an appropriate option:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + M (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + M (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > Special.
- Choose the command Special in the Context menu.
3. Enter a value in the fields Horizontal and/or Vertical in the Offset section. Positive values
move the picture preview to the right or downwards, negative values move the picture pre-
view to the left or upwards. The reference point is top/left.
4. Click OK to close the dialog.

Resizing Picture Object


The picture crop may of course also be determined by subsequently altering the size of the pic-
ture object. If you resize the picture object upwards or to the left the image preview inside will
follow the movement, not changing its offset inside the picture object.

Resizing a picture object:


1. Choose a picture object.
2. Resize the picture object and observe the image preview.
If however you select Crop image on all sides when stretching in the Document Preferences for
Pages & Objects, the picture remains in its position in relation to the page, and the offset within
the picture object will change.

143
Working with Pictures

The command Fit Frame to Picture in the Picture menu as well as the Context menu is related to
resizing the picture object. The command causes the picture object to take the same size as the
imported image inside according to its actual scale.

Fitting the picture object to the picture preview:


1. Choose a picture object.
2. Choose an appropriate option:
- Choose the menu command Picture > Fit Frame to Picture.
- Choose the command Fit Frame to Picture in the Context menu.
The size of the picture object now corresponds to the size of the picture preview in its current
scaling. At the same time the picture preview is automatically centered in the picture object.

Summary Moving Picture Content


- You may move the image preview interactively using the mouse or the arrow keys.
- You may position the image preview exactly by entering values for the vertical and hori-
zontal offset into the entry fields of the Module palette (Picture mode).
- You may center the image preview relatively according to the size of the picture object
using the Center command from the Picture > Alignment menu. You also may use the
shortcut keys Ctrl + Shift + M (Windows/Linux) or Command + Shift + M (Mac).
- You may position the image relatively according to its actual scale using the command Fit
Frame to Picture from the Picture menu.
- You may crop the image by resizing the picture object.
- If you resize the picture object upwards or to the left the position of the image inside will
change in relation to the page.
- If you resize the picture object upwards or to the left the position of the image inside will
not change in relation to the page if in the Document Preferences for Pages & Objects the
option Crop image on all sides when stretching is selected.

Mirror, Rotate and Skew


You can mirror, rotate and skew picture previews in picture objects.

Mirroring, rotating or skewing picture previews with the Module palette:


1. Activate the Picture mode.
2. Click the checkbox Mirror Horizontally or Mirror Vertically in the Module palette (Picture
mode) to mirror the picture.
3. Enter an angle between -360 and +360 degrees in the entry field Rotation to rotate the picture
preview in the picture object. Alternatively, click the arrow buttons on the right of the entry
field to rotate one degree at a time. Positive values rotate the picture preview anti-clock-
144
Working with Pictures

wise, negative values rotate the picture preview clockwise. The rotation occurs around the
center point of the picture preview.
4. Enter an angle between -75 und +75 degrees in the entry field Skew to skew the picture pre-
view in the picture object. Alternatively, click the arrow buttons on the right of the entry
field to skew one degree at a time. Positive values rotate the picture preview to the right,
negative values rotate the picture preview to the left.

Mirroring, rotating or skewing picture previews with the dialog:


1. Choose a Picture object.
2. Choose an appropriate option to activate the Object mode:
- Click the object frame.
- Click on the image surface while holding down the Ctrl key (Windows/Linux) or the
Command key (Mac).
- Move the mouse over the middle of the object until the gray Object Mode Select button
appears and click once. If the button does not appear, the object height or width is too
small and you must choose another option.
3. Choose one of the follwing options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + M (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + M (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > Special.
- With the mouse button held down, choose the command Special in the Context menu.
4. Click the checkbox Horizontal or Vertical in the Mirroring section to mirror the image.
5. Enter an angle between -360 and +360 degrees in the entry field Rotation to rotate the pic-
ture preview in the picture object. Positive values rotate the picture preview anti-clockwise,
negative values rotate the picture preview clockwise. The rotation occurs around the center
point of the picture preview.
6. Enter an angle between -75 and +75 degrees in the entry field Skew, when you want to skew
the picture preview in the picture object. Positive values rotate the picture preview to the
right, negative values rotate the picture preview to the left.
7. Click OK to close the dialog.
Note:
- If however while creating the document it is already determined that the image should be
rotated it is advisable to execute the action in the original illustration or drawing pro-
gram. This will enhance the printing speed later on considerably.
- If a rotation in the program cannot be avoided, then a rotation without decimal places
will hardly slow down the printing speed. For diaply on the monitor this is not relevant.
- The same goes for images requiring a skew factor.

145
Working with Pictures

Scaling Image Preview


The scaling of an image may be set horizontally or vertically independently. While doing so the
original file will not be altered, only the imported image in the document will be shown and
printed with the set size. Such changes therefore have no effect on the actual image file.
Although the program allows scaling factors between 1% and 1600% of the original size, you
should give careful consideration to the picture scaling with raster images, as:
- If you enlarge a raster image considerably in the program this can result in undesired loss
of quality in the output.
- If you make a raster image considerably smaller in the program there will not be a loss of
quality, but the information sent to the output device is unnecessarily large which will
slow down the printing speed.
Vector images on the other hand may be given any scaling you like, as there will be no loss of
quality in the output.
The program offers many possibilities for changing the scaling proportionally and unpropor-
tionally:

Scaling image preview proportionally:


1. Activate Picture Mode.
2. Choose one of the following options to apply one of the default scaling factors:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + 5 (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + 5 (Mac) to
apply a scaling of 50%.
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + 7 (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + 7 (Mac) to
apply a scaling of 75%.
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + 1 (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + 1 (Mac) to
apply a scaling of 100% (original size), or selext the command Original Size in the Con-
text menu.
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + 2 (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + 2 (Mac) to
apply a scaling of 200%.
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + 4 (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + 4 (Mac) to
apply a scaling of 400%.
- Choose a scaling factor between25% and 400% in the Picture menu.
- Choose a scaling factor between25% and 400% in the popup menus Horizontal Scale and
Vertical Scale in the Module palette (choose the same setting for both).
3. Choose one of the following options to fit the image preview proportionally into the Picture
object:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + 0 (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + 0 (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Picture > Fit Picture Proportionally to Frame.
- Choose the command Fit Picture Proportionally to Frame in the Context Menu. With this
146 action the picture preview will be centered automatically.
Working with Pictures

4. If you have a mouse with a scroll wheel, hold down the Alt key (Windows/Linux) or the
Option key (Mac) and scroll in the appropriate direction to enlarge or reduce the picture
preview in 5% steps.
- Additionally, hold down the Shift key to enlarge or reduce the picture preview in 1% steps
with the scroll wheel.
5. Use the Sliding Scale to enlarge or reduce the picture preview. Every time you release the
slider, it will be rest to the middle and the enlargement or reduction of the image preview
size will be implemented.
6. If you want to scale proportionally both the picture preview and the picture object, hold
down the keys Ctrl + Shift (Windows/Linux) or Command + Shift (Mac) while you resize the
object.

Scaling image preview unproportionally:


1. Activate Picture Mode.
2. Choose an appropriate option in the Module palette:
- Choose an entry from the popup menus Horizontal Scale and/or Vertical Scale .
- Enter a value in the field for Horizontal Scale and/or Vertical Scale. The entry fields
accept values between 1% and 1600% in 0,001% steps.
- Enter a measurement in any measurement unit in the fields Width and Height.
3. Choose an appropriate option to fit the image preview into the Picture object unpropor-
tionally:
- Choose the menu command Picture > Fit Picture to Frame.
- Choose the command Fit Picture to Frame in the Context menu.
With this action the picture preview will be centered automatically.
4. To scale unproportionally both the picture preview and the picture object, hold down the
keys Control + Alt (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option (Mac) and resize the object.

Scaling image preview unproportionally with the dialog:


1. Choose a Picture object.
2. Choose an appropriate option:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + Alt + M (Windows/Linux) or Command + Option + M (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Object > Special.
- Choose the command Special in the Context menu.
3. Enter a value in the field for Horizontal Scaling and/or Vertical Scaling. The entry fields
accept values between 1% and 1600% in 0,001% steps.
4. Click OK to close the dialog.
When the Picture palette is shown the actual scaling factors will be substituted in the entry
fields.
147
Working with Pictures

It is not necessary to enter the %-mark as these entry fields are for percentages only. The pro-
gram will add the %-mark automatically after entering a value.
If the picture object is an oval or a polygon, the program will calculate the scaling factor
according to the rectangle enclosing the picture object. The actual position of the image within
the object will be ignored.

Tips and Tricks with Images


VivaDesigner offers many options for steering the import, display and output of images.

Image import
- If you work with raster images in EPS or TIFF format, ensure that the image files are created
with a full size TIFF preview. In this case the program will not check through the entire file
but will just read and display the appropriate preview.
- If you work with vector images in EPS format, ensure that the image files are created with
a TIFF preview, so that the images can be displayed on all platforms.
- If a picture file has no image preview and no preview can be created by the program, a
gray surface will be displayed. At output or export as PostScript file the gray surface will
be replaced with the correct picture, providing that in the Objects tab of the output dia-
log the option High Resolution has been selected.
- Use the setting EPS Image Preview in the Program Preferences for Imagesto define
whether and in which quality the preview of vector images in EPS format should be dis-
played. The higher the quality, the longer it will take to import the image file.

Image display
- Use the setting Color Depth in the Document Preferences (Pages & Objects) to define in
which quality the preview should be displayed (8 Bit or 24 Bit). With the higher quality,
more working memory is needed.
- Use the command Quick Picture View in the View menu to define if the preview should be
switched on or off. If you click in a picture object and activate Picture Mode, the preview
will always be displayed, irrelevant of whether the command Quick Picture View is
switched on or not.
- The definition Limit image scaling to in the Document Preferences (Pages & Objects) is set
to 1024 Pixel as default. You may uncrease this, but you must be aware that the higher
the value, the more working memory (RAM) will be required. Any change to the setting
will only take effect on newly imported images in the document.

148
Working with Pages
Working with Pages

Working with Pages


Working with document pages
Every document has one or more document pages. Objects can be placed on
document pages, and content (images, texts, etc.) can be imported into
them. When creating a new document the program automatically creates at
least one page. You can of course create and manage multiple pages. In this
chapter you will learn what types of pages there are, how to create, Choose,
delete, move and number pages automatically.

For navigation and the selection of pages the program offers you the commands
in the Document menu, the Page palette, the Navigation bar and the docu-
ment window.

Create a new document page


Up to 6,000 document pages may be created in a document. New document pages can be
created with the command New Document Page(s) or interactively with the Page palette.

Create new document pages using the dialog:


1. Choose one of the following options:
- Choose the menu command Document > Create > New Document Page(s).
- Click on the Document Pages section of the Page palette and choose the command New
Document Page(s) in the Context menu.
2. Define the number of new document pages in the Number entry field.
3. In the dialog section Position, Choose where the document pages should appear.
4. Choose one of the following options:
- Click the checkbox Assign Alias Page to assign the default settings you defined in the
Document Setup dialog.
- Leave the checkbox unchecked to import a blank page with no settings or guides.
5. Click OK to close the dialog.

150
Working with Pages

Create new (blank) document page(s) interactively:


1. Click the mouse in the list section of the Page palette on the option [Blank Page] and hold
down the mouse button .
2. Keep the mouse button held down and move the mouse to the symbol section of the Page
palette.
3. Position the mouse pointer between, above, below or next to existing document pages and
release the mouse key at the desired position.

Create new (default) document page(s) interactively:


1. Click the mouse in the list section of the Page palette on the option A-Alias Page and hold
down the mouse button .
2. Keep the mouse button held down and move the mouse to the symbol section of the Page
palette.
3. Position the mouse pointer between, above, below or next to existing document pages and
release the mouse key at the desired position.
When creating new document pages with the dialog you can take over or copy objects from the
current page onto the new document pages.

Selecting document pages


The program offers different possibilities for selecting a document page:

Select a document page:


1. Click on the required page in the document window. If the required document page is not
visible, use the scrolling arrows or the scroll bar of the document window or the scroll wheel
of the mouse to display the document page and then click on the document page.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Click the page icon of the document page you want to display in the Page palette.
- Click in the page field of the Navigation bar. Enter the document page number and press
the Tab, Enter or Return key to display the document page.
- Use the commands First Page, Last Page, Previous Page and Next Page in the Document
menu.
- Use the navigation buttons First Page, Last Page, Previous Page and Next Page in the Navi-
gation bar.

151
Working with Pages

Page views
You can choose different page views in the program:
1. If you are working on a handbook or manual with long texts, it is often suitable to have the
page view in single page mode, so that all the pages are displayed below one another.
2. In other cases facing page mode is more suitable, where two or more pages are displayed
next to one another.
3. If you are using an additional module for digital imposition, the document pages can be
displayed as a spread or press sheet.

Document Composition:
1. Click in the document window on the arrow next to the document composition symbol.
2. Choose the option Single Page or Facing Pages.
In the Single Page mode, all the document pages will be displayed below one another, irrele-
vant of whether they were left or right hand pages.
In the Facing Page mode, all the document pages will be displayed as in a book, with the left
and right hand pages from the second page onwards facing each other. The first document
page will be displayed as a right hand single page.
Note:
The position of the document pages may be changed at any time in the Facing Page mode, so
that many combinations are possible. In Single Page mode the position can also be changed
(page order). However, switching to Single Page mode causes the settings for individual page
composition to be lost.

Page Preview in the Page palette


The Page Preview option in the Page palette is often helpful when you are scrolling through
larger documents whose pages contain graphics or images, such as catalogs. Thumbnail pre-
views are created in the Page palette to help you recognize your pages.

Activate/Deactivate Page View:


1. Right click in the Document Pages section of the Page palette and choose the command
Show Page Preview in the Context menu.
2. Repeat the command to deactivate the Page Preview.

152
Working with Pages

Deleting document pages


You can delete single or multiple document pages with a menu command or with the Page palette.

Deleting document pages with the dialog:


1. Choose the menu command Document > Delete document Page(s).
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Type a number in the Number entry field (e.g. 3) to delete a single page.
- Type a range in the Number entry field (e.g. 3-5) to delete several consecutive pages (in
this example pages 3, 4 and 5).
- Type an open range to the end of the document in the Number entry field (e.g. 10-) to
delete all pages from the named page (in this example from page 10).
- Type numbers and ranges in the Number entry field (e.g. 3, 5, 8-12, 15) to delete several
nonconsecutive pages (in this example pages 3, 5, 8 to 12 and 15).

Deleting document pages interactively:


1. 1. Choose a document page to be deleted in the Page palette.
- - Use the Shift key to choose additional consecutive pages and/or the Ctrl key (Windows/
Linux) or the Command key (Mac) to choose nonconsecutive pages.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- - Press the Del key.
- - Choose the command Delete in the Context menu.
After deleting, the pages following those deleted will move up.
When the Facing Page mode is selected, the pages following will be rearranged. Depending on
how many and which pages were deleted, previously left hand pages will become right hand
pages and vice versa.
When document pages are deleted, generally all objects and content on the pages will be
deleted too.
NOT deleted are:
- Objects that cover several pages in Facing Page mode. These objects will only be deleted
when all document pages are deleted on which the object is placed.
- Texts that are linked with text objects on other pages in a text chain. The text will only be
deleted when all document pages in the current text chain are deleted.
- Objects on the clipboard area. These objects will only be deleted when all document pages
in the spread are deleted.

153
Working with Pages

Move document pages


You can move single or several document pages using the Page palette to change the page
arrangement.

Move document pages interactively:


1. Click in the Page palette on the symbol of the document page that you want to move and
hold down the mouse button.
2. Drag the mouse pointer between, above, below or next to existing document pages and
release the mouse key at the desired position.
Note:
- Moving pages cannot be reversed or undone with the Undo command. In this case you must
move the page back to its original position.
- If you position new document pages on the right of existing document pages in Single Page
mode and release the mouse button, the new document will be positioned not next to the
page but below the page next to which it was positioned.
- If a document page in Facing Page mode is moved, following pages will move up auto-
matically.
- If a document page in Facing Page mode is moved and a new spread is created by moving
the page, the first page of the following spread must also be moved in order to display the
Facing Page mode correctly.

154
Working with Pages

Working with Alias pages


The program differs between document pages and Alias pages. When a new
document is created, a document page on which you can place your objects
will then be displayed in the document window. At the same time the default
A-Alias Page was automatically applied to the document page. An Alias page
is a kind of page template on which you can place objects that appear again
and again, so that these objects appear automatically on the required docu-
ment pages.

In this manual the chapter headers and page numbers were not recreated for
each page. Instead, these elements were placed on Alias pages.

Switch between Alias and document pages


You can switch between the display of Alias and document pages at any time.

Switch to an Alias page:


Choose one of the following options to display an Alias page:
- Click in the Navigation bar on the arrow next to the Page type symbol. In the Alias pages
section of the popup menu, Choose the required Alias page name.
- Double-click on the name of the required Alias page in the Page palette.
- Click in the Page field of the Navigation bar. Now enter the prefix for the Alias page and
press the Tab, Enter or Return key to display the Alias page.
Thanks to the striped clipboard area (default) or the view previously described in the Preferences,
you can recognise immediately that you are on an Alias page. The name of the Alias page will
be displayed in the Page field. Additionally, the page symbol next to the name of the Alias
page is highlighted in the Page palette.
To display a document page again, the program offers you several possibilities:

Switch to document pages:


Choose one of the following options to switch from an Alias to a Document page:
- Click in the Navigation bar on the arrow next to the Page type symbol. Choose the option
Document Page from the popup menu. With this option the program springs to the first
page of the document.
- Double-click on the required document page in the Page palette.
- Click in the Page field of the Navigation bar. Now enter the number of the required docu-
ment page and press the Tab, Enter or Return key.

155
Working with Pages

Create new Alias page


In a document you can create as many Alias pages as you like. Every Alias page receives a
unique prefix and a name.
The prefix consists of a maximum of 3 characters and may only appear once in a document.
When creating a new document an Alias page with the prefix A will be created automatically.
Therefore when a new Alias page is created the program suggests the prefix B. For further Alias
pages the letters C, D, etc. will be suggested. You can choose another prefix as long as this is
unique and is not used in the document.
The name consists of a maximum of 256 characters and may appear several times in a docu-
ment. You can change the suggested name for the Alias Page at any time.
The option fields Single Page and Facing Pages define which page type should be applied to
the Alias pages.
Choose the option Single Page if all objects on the new Alias page should always be displayed
identically on left and right hand document pages.
Choose the option Facing Pages as soon as one or more objects (e.g. header bars, page num-
ber, etc.) are to be displayed differently on left and right hand document pages.

Create new Alias page:


1. Choose one of the following Options to create an Alias Page:
- - Choose the menu command Document > Create > New Alias Page.
- - Click in the Alias page section in the Page palette, click the mouse button to display
the Context Menu and choose the command New Alias Page.
2. Enter an individual prefix and the name of the new Alias page or accept the suggestion
made by the program.
3. Choose the option Single Page or Facing Page in the dialog area Page Type.
4. Click OK to close the dialog.
The program will now show the new Alias page in the document window and in the Page palette.
- If the Alias page type is Single Page, a single page symbol will be displayed in front of the
Alias page name in the Page palette.
- If the Alias page type is Facing Pages, a facing page symbol will be displayed in front of
the Alias page name in the Page palette.
Note:
Think carefully about which page type you choose, as this setting cannot be changed later! If
it turns out later that you have chosen the wrong page type, you will have to create a new
Alias page, copy the objects from the old Alias page to the new one and delete the old Alias
page. Then you can assign the new Alias page to the required document pages.

156
Working with Pages

Switch between Alias pages


The program offers different possibilities for switching between Alias pages:

Switch between Alias pages:


Choose one of the following options to switch between Alias pages:
- Click in the document window on the arrow next to the Page type symbol. Choose the
name of the Alias page required from the display below Alias Pages in the popup menu.
- Double-click in the Page palette on the name of the Alias page required.
- Click in the Page field of the Navigation bar. Now enter the prefix of the Alias page and
press the Tab, Enter or Return key.
- Use the commands First Page, Last Page, Previous Page and Next Page in the Document
Menu.
- Click the navigation buttons First Page, Last Page, Previous Page and Next Page in the
Navigation bar.
Thanks to the striped clipboard area (default) or the view previously described in the Preferences,
you can recognise immediately that you are on an Alias page. The name of the Alias page will
be displayed in the Page field. Additionally, the page symbol next to the name of the Alias
page is highlighted in the Page palette.

Assign an Alias page to a document page


When a new document is created, the Alias page A-Alias Page is automatically assigned to the
document page. You can change this assignment for document pages at any time.

Assign an Alias page to a document page with the dialog:


1. Select the document page to which you want to assign an Alias page.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Choose the menu command Document > Document Page Settings.
- Click in the Page palette on the symbol of the appropriate document page and choose
the command Document Page Settings in the Context menu.
3. Choose the required Alias page from the dialog area Alias Page.
4. Click OK to close the dialog.

157
Working with Pages

Assign an Alias page to a document page interactively:


1. Ensure that the symbol of the appropriate document page and the name of the Alias page
are displayed in the Page palette.
2. Click the mouse on the name of the Alias page and hold the mouse button down.
3. Keep the mouse button held down and move the mouse to the symbol of the appropriate
document page.
4. Release the mouse button as soon as the required document page is displayed in the chosen
color.

Assign one Alias page to several document pages at once:


1. Use the mouse to choose several document pages in the Page palette. Use the Shift key to
choose consecutive pages and/or the Ctrl key (Windows/Linux) or the Command key (Mac)
to choose nonconsecutive pages.
2. Click with the right mouse button (Windows/Linux) or with the Command key held down
(Mac) on the name of the Alias page you want to assign and hold down the mouse button.
3. Choose the option Assign marked Alias to selected pages.
The document page symbol in the Page palette now shows the prefix of the assigned Alias page
and the objects of the Alias page will now appear on the document page. To assign another
Alias page to document pages, repeat the previous steps.
Note:
If you assign an Alias page in Single Page mode that was created as facing pages, the docu-
ment page will always have the left hand Alias page assigned to it.

Deleting the assignment of Alias pages


If you want to remove the assignment of Alias pages to document pages, you can assign an
empty page to a document page. Proceed exactly as previously with the assignment of an Alias
page, and choose the option [Blank Page] in the Document Page Settings Dialog or in the Page
palette.

Create new document pages with Alias page


Instead of assigning an Alias page to an existing document page, you can assign the Alias
page automatically when new document pages are created.
The taking over of Alias pages into document pages is just as flexible as taking over objects.
You have already learned that in the creation of a new document an Alias page will be
assigned automatically. This Alias page is given the default name A-Alias Page. You have also
learned how the assignment of a document page and an Alias page is changed. Now you will
create new document pages and assign an Alias page of your choice to them automatically.

158
Working with Pages

Create new document pages with Alias page using Dialog:


1. Choose the menu command Document > Create > New Document Page(s).
2. Define the number of new pages in the Number field.
3. Choose an option in the Position area to choose where the new document pages will appear.
4. Choose the option Assign Alias Page and choose an Alias page from the popup menu.
5. Click OK to close the dialog.

Create new document pages with Alias page interactively:


1. Ensure that the name of the Alias page which will be assigned to the new document page is
displayed in the Page palette.
2. Click with the mouse on the name of the Alias page (list area) and hold down the mouse
button.
3. Keep the mouse button held down and move the mouse to the page symbol area of the Page
palette.
4. Position the mouse pointer between, above, below or next to existing document pages and
release the mouse key at the desired position.

Deleting Alias pages


When Alias pages are deleted, both the Alias page itself and also all assignments to document
pages will be deleted. Here all objects on document pages whose originals were on the Alias
page will also be deleted.

Delete Alias page:


1. Select an Alias Page to be deleted in the Page palette. Use the Shift key to choose consecu-
tive Alias Pages and/or the Ctrl key (Windows/Linux) or the Command key (Mac) to choose
nonconsecutive pages.
2. Choose an appropriate option to delete one or more Alias pages:
- Press the Del key.
- Choose the menu command Document > Delete Alias Page(s).
- Choose the command Delete in the Context menu.
- Double-click the Alias page symbol to switch to Alias page mode and choose the command
Delete Alias Page(s) in the Context menu.
3. Confirm the Warning question by clicking OK.
Note:
- An Alias page cannot be deleted when it is the only Alias page in the document.
- If an Alias page that is assigned to a document page is deleted, then a blank page is auto-
matically assigned to that document page. Objects that do not come from the Alias page
are retained.

159
Working with Pages

Change Alias page name


The prefix and the name of the Alias page may be changed at any time as long as the naming
conventions are adhered to.

Change Alias page name:


1. Choose an Alias page.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Double-click the Alias page and choose the command Document > Alias Page Settings,
change the Prefix and/or the Name and click OK to close the dialog.
- Right-click the Alias page and choose the command Rename in the Context menu.
Change the Prefix and/or the Name and press either Return or Enter to confirm.

Duplicate Alias Pages


For a manual or a small catalog you may want to have chapter or category-oriented Alias
pages, maybe with header bars of the same size, shape and position, but in different colors.
Creating each Alias Page from scratch and copying objects from one Alias page to the next is of
course possible, but not an ideal way of working. Therefore the program offers the function to
duplicate an Alias page.

Duplicate Alias Page:


1. Select an Alias page.
2. Right click and choose the command Duplicate from the Context menu.
A new Alias page will be created with the next available prefix. Any objects you have created
on the Alias page will be duplicated as well and can of course be edited on the new Alias page.

160
Working with Pages

Protect Alias Pages


If you want to give your document to someone else for editing and have put much effort into
creating an Alias page structure, you may want to protect your Alias pages against uninten-
tional loss or damage. In this case you can lock the Alias pages with a password so that they
cannot be edited.

Protect Alias Page:


1. Choose an Alias page.
2. Right click the Alias page in the Page palette and choose the command Protection from the
Context menu.
3. Enter a password in the Password entry field and repeat the entry in the next entry field.
Choose the option Make visible to display the password in clear text on the screen.
4. Click OK to confirm the password.
Now a lock symbol will appear for the Alias page on the right hand side of the palette.

Unlock Alias Page:


1. Choose the Alias page in the Page palette.
2. Right click and choose the command Cancel Protection in the Context menu.
3. Enter the password and confirm.

161
Working with Pages

Working with page numbers


Define page numbering
One document page is created automatically in the creation of a new document. This docu-
ment page receives the page number 1. All following pages are then numbered automatically.
This page numbering controlled by the program may be extended by the user with the help of
a prefix, or changed individually through a new numbering for every document page. In this
book a new page numbering has been used for every chapter. All pages are numbered starting
with page number 1, and have been given a prefix.
The chapter Working with Text describes how to insert page numbers in the text.
The program provides different possibilities for changing the page numbering:

Change page numbering:


1. Choose the document page whose page numbering you want to change:
- Choose the menu command Document > Document Page Settings.
- Right click on the document page in the Page palette and choose the command Docu-
ment Page Settings in the Context menu.
2. Click the option New Numbering.
3. If you want to define a Prefix, enter a combination of max. 3 characters in the Prefix entry
field (e.g. A-).
4. Enter a number between 1 and 9999 (e.g. 1234) in the entry field New Page Number.
5. If you want to choose a different numbering format, Choose an option from the popup
menu Format. The program provides the option of Arabic numbers, Roman numbers in
upper or lower case and also the Roman alphabet in upper or lower case.
6. Click OK to close the dialog.
The document will now be recalculated. Starting from the current page, all following document
pages will receive the prefix and the page numbering assigned until a new page numbering is
applied. The page number of the following pages is also increased each time by 1.
The start of a new page numbering is shown in the Page palette and in the Page field of the
Navigation bar with an asterisk before the page number.
If a page with an even page number that is positioned on the left is given an odd number
through the new page numbering, this page will automatically be displayed on the right when
in the Preferences the option Position Chapter Page automatically is activated. This option is
activated as default for the creation of new documents.

162
Working with Pages

Using variables for page numbers


If you want to output page numbers in text objects, you should not enter these page numbers
individually with the keyboard, but use variables that are automatically updated when the
page number is changed through insertion, deletion or alteration of document pages.
The program offers a series of variables to display page numbers in text.

Inserting variables for page numbers in text:


1. Choose an appropriate option:
- Click in an existing text object.
- Create a text object on a document page and activate the text mode.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Choose the menu command Text > Insert Variable.
- Choose the command Insert Variable in the Context menu.
3. Choose one of the following options in the popup menu:
- Choose the command Page Number if you want to output the current page number.
- Choose the command Number of Pages if you want to output the total number of pages.
- Choose the command Next Page Number if you want to output the page number of the
following page. If no following page exists, nothing will be displayed.
- Choose the command Previous Page Number if you want to output the page number of
the previous page. If no previous page exists, nothing will be displayed.
- Choose the command Continued from if you want to output the page number of the page
from which the text has been continued. If no document page exists from which the text
was continued, nothing will be displayed.
- Choose the command Continued on if you want to output the page number of the page
on which the text is continued. If no document page exists on which the text could be
continued, nothing will be displayed.
When the page number is placed in a separate text object, you should place all page numbers
on Alias pages. Proceed exactly as described in the previous example. After importing the page
number into the text object on the Alias page, not the page number but a variable appears.
This variable will be converted to a page number automatically when the document page is
displayed.

163
Working with Pages

Logical and physical page numbers


In working with pages, the program differs between physical and logical page numbers. Inso-
far as the user makes no changes in the Page Numbering in the document using the command
Document Page Settings, the physical and logical page numbering is identical. This means that
the last page number will match the total number of document pages.
When a document has pages whose page number is not the same as the physical document
page, the page field automatically displays first the logical page number and then in brackets
the physical page number and the total number of pages.
If you have entered a page number in a document manually, and enter a page number in the
page field of the navigation bar, the program will always show the first page that corresponds
to the page number, whether it is a physical or logical page number.
If you have used page numbers in text objects, these always take on the logical page numbers,
irrelevant of what settings you have made in the Program Preferences.

Define the page number display in the Preferences:


1. Choose the menu command Edit > Preferences (Windows/Linux) or VivaDesigner > Preferences
(Mac).
2. In the Program/General tab, choose the option Physical or Logical from the Page Numbers
option in the Options area.
The option is only relevant to the display of the page numbers in the Page palette and in the
Page field of the Navigation bar.

164
Working with Style Sheets
Working with Style Sheets

Working with Style Sheets


Introduction
A Style Sheet can be regarded as a collection of options for the assigning of
attributes to text, objects or images. Using Style Sheets, the user can apply a
whole series of options simultaneously with a single keystroke. The advantage
of this method lies not only in the fast application of several options, but also
in flexibility for additional editing. For this reason, a professional user will
always work with a large number of Style Sheets so as to complete his task
quickly and in a structured way.

The program offers extensive functions for the creation, management and
application of Style Sheets. Here below is a brief overview:

- Style Sheets can be applied to text, objects and images.


- Text Style Sheets can be applied to characters, paragraphs and layouts.
- Style Sheets only change the options that have been defined in the Style
Sheet.
- Style Sheets can be inherited, which means that they can be used as
models or templates for additional Style Sheet definitions.

Create/Import Text Style Sheets


Create Text Style Sheets
You can create a Text Style Sheet for characters, paragraphs and layouts. When you create a
Character Style Sheet, you have all the options available for characters. If you want to create a
Paragraph Style Sheet, you have all the options available for paragraphs, plus as an option all
the options available for characters. If you want to create a Layout Style Sheet, you have all the
options available for layouts.

Create a simple Text Style Sheet:


1. Choose one of the following options:
- Select the menu command Edit/Style Sheets and select the option New.
- Right click in the Style Sheets Palette and choose the option New in the context menu.
2. Select your own name for the Style Sheet, or alternatively select one of the predefined
166 names.
Working with Style Sheets

3. Select a Style Sheet Type:


- Select the option Character if you want to create a Character Style Sheet.
- Select the option Paragraph if you want to create a Paragraph Style Sheet.
- Select the option Layout if you want to create a Layout Style Sheet.
4. Select the option Based on actual settings if you want to take over all corresponding attri-
butes of the text in which the cursor is currently placed. The option can be selected when the
text mode is active.
5. In the dialog section General, choose a key or key combination for faster application. Click
in the entry field and press a single key or key combination. The program supports the fol-
lowing keys/key combinations:
- the Numeric Keypad,
- the Numeric Keypad, in combination with the Ctrl key (Windows/Linux), or the Command
key (Mac) and/or the Alt key (Windows/Linux) or the Option key (Mac),
- the function keys F5 to F12,
- the function keys F5 to F12, in combination with the Ctrl key (Windows/Linux), or the
Command key (Mac) and/or the Alt key (Windows/Linux) or the Option key (Mac) and/or
the Windows key (Windows/Linux) or the ctrl key (Mac) and/or the Shift key.
Note:
If your current document contains a Style Sheet operating with the same key combination
that has been assigned to a palette, then the palette activation and de-activation function of
this key will take precedence and the key combination will not work for the Style Sheet.
6. Choose the settings for characters, paragraphs or layouts in the respective dialogs. If you
have applied the option Based on actual settings, all the options are already predefined. If
you have not applied this option, you can decide individually which options you want to
apply.
When the Style Sheet is applied in the text only those options will be applied that were defined
in the Style Sheet. You can work even more effectively with Style Sheets if when you create a
new one you apply an existing one as a template. This way of working is particularly helpful if
for example you want to create several Paragraph Style Sheets that all have the same character
options. Instead of repeating the character options in every Paragraph Style Sheet, you simply
select a Character Style Sheet as a template for every Paragraph Style Sheet. In this way you
save not only the repeated settings in all the Paragraph Style Sheets but also avoid possible
errors arising from creating several Style Sheets with the same settings. Furthermore, this
method also enables you to change all related Paragraph Style Sheets by changing a single
Character Style Sheet.

Create a text Style Sheet with a template:


1. Create a Style Sheet as described above or choose an existing Style Sheet.
2. In the General dialog area, choose a Template:
- For Character Style Sheets, choose an existing Character Style Sheet as the template.

167
Working with Style Sheets

- For Paragraph Style Sheets, choose an existing Paragraph Style Sheet and/or a Character
Style Sheet as the template. If you choose a Character Style Sheet, the character options
will be deactivated automatically.
- For Layout Style Sheets, choose an existing Layout Style Sheet as the template.
- Choose the option None to cancel the selection of a template.
Tips for creating Text Style Sheets:
- Style Sheet names must be unique in the entire document, irrelevant of their type. A name
may not be used twice.
- Predefined Style Sheet names are displayed in square brackets.
- You can use the predefined Style Sheet names as often as you like. In this case the Style
Sheets are numbered by the program.
- The use of predefined Style Sheet names is helpful if you are exchanging documents inter-
nationally, as these names are translated automatically. In this case, the structure of the
text is easily recognisable for a newcomer (e.g. Body Text, Chapter, Lists, etc.), even if he
doesn’t understand the text content in the relevant language.
- With the use of templates, you can minimize the number of Style sheets and simplify the
management of them. In this case we recommend not using the option Based on actual
settings and setting the options manually.
- By using shortcut keys you can apply Style Sheets faster. If there are overlaps with pro-
gram shortcuts, the shortcuts for the Style Sheets will be ignored.

Importing Text Style Sheets


You can take over Style Sheets from other documents by selecting a text or a text object with
the appropriate Style Sheets, copying and pasting into the target document. when you take
over Style Sheets from other documents that have identical names to and are of the same type
as those of the target document, the settings in the target document will be applied to the
imported text.

Assigning Text Style Sheets


Assigning Text Style Sheets manually
You can apply Character, Paragraph and Layout Style Sheets to a text both manually and auto-
matically.

Assigning Text Style Sheets manually:


1. Choose one of the following options:
- To assign a Character Style Sheet, mark the appropriate text.
- To assign a Paragraph Style Sheet to a paragraph, position the cursor anywhere in the
paragraph. Alternatively you can mark a text section within the paragraph.
- To assign a Paragraph Style Sheet to several paragraphs, mark the paragraphs. It is only
necessary to mark a part of each paragraph, marking all the paragraphs completely is
unnecessary.
168
Working with Style Sheets

- To assign a Layout Style Sheet, position the cursor anywhere in the text. If you are using
several layouts in the text, position the cursor in the appropriate Layout.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Choose the required Style Sheet in the menu Text/Character Style Sheet or Text/Paragraph
Style Sheet or Text/Layout Style Sheet.
- Click the Style Sheet name in the Style Sheets palette.
- Press the shortcut key combination that is displayed after the Style Sheet name in the
Style Sheets palette.
Notes on the manual assignment of Text Style Sheets:
- If you assign a Style Sheet to a text that already posesses identical attributes, these iden-
tical attributes in the Style Sheet will not be assigned. After the Style sheet has been
assigned, a plus sign will appear in the Style Sheets palette.
- If you assign a Style Sheet to a text that already posesses identical attributes, you can
overwrite them with the settings in the Style Sheet by double-clicking the name of the
Style Sheet in the Style Sheets palette. This will cause the plus sign to disappear.
- Alternatively you can click the name of the Style Sheet in the Style Sheets palette and
choose the option Overwrite all settings in selection.
- Alternatively you can click the name of the Style Sheet in the Style Sheets palette and
choose the option Overwrite all settings in story.

Assigning Text Style sheets automatically


Text Style Sheets can also be assigned using the option Search & Replace. This option is partic-
ularly helpful when
- you want to assign Style Sheets to a Text whose attributes have been assigned manually, or
- you want to replace Style Sheets in a text with other Style Sheets.

Assign Text Style Sheets automatically:


1. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + F (Windows/Linux) or Command + F (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Text > Search & Replace.
2. In the Search section, choose a combination of Text, Font, Font Size, Text Color or Language
to enable the relevant text to be identified.
3. Choose an existing Character or Paragraph Style Sheet in the Replace section.

Replace Text Style Sheets automatically:


1. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + F (Windows/Linux) or Command + F (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Text > Search & Replace.
2. In the Search section, choose a Style Sheet Type:

169 - Choose the option Character Style Sheet if you want to search for a Character Style Sheet.
Working with Style Sheets

- Choose the option Paragraph Style Sheet if you want to search for a Paragraph Style Sheet.
- Choose the option Layout Style Sheet if you want to search for a Layout Style Sheet.
3. Choose the Style Sheet you want to search for.
4. In the Replace section, choose a Style Sheet of the same type or of another type. Here you
can for example search for a Character Style sheet and replace it with a Paragraph Style
Sheet.
A very good method of assigning Style Sheets to new text automatically is provided by the
options in the Preferences. Here you can choose Character, Paragraph and Layout Style Sheets
that will be assigned to new text objects automatically.

Assign Text Style Sheets automatically using the Preferences:


1. Create a Text Style Sheet of your choice. If you do this without a document being open, this
Style Sheet will be available for all new documents.
2. Choose the menu command Edit > Preferences (Windows/Linux) or VivaDesigner >
Preferences (Mac).
3. Choose the Text section.
4. Choose a Character, Paragraph and/or Layout Style Sheet from the Default Style Sheets
section.
5. Click OK. The settings take immediate and automatic effect on
- all new text and table objects.
- all new documents, if at the time of making the setting no document is open.

Changing the assignment of Text Style Sheets


You can change the assignment of Text Style Sheets at any time. This is done either by choosing
the option None or by assigning another Style Sheet. The option None has the effect that the
assignment of the Style Sheet is cancelled. In this case the default options will be assigned to
the text (default font, default font size, etc.), but any manual settings that have been made
will be retained. The default options are not editable.

Cancel or change a Text Style Sheet assignment manually:


1. Choose one of the following options:
- To cancel or change the assignment of a Character Style Sheet, mark the appropriate
text.
- To cancel or change the assignment of a Paragraph Style Sheet in one paragraph, place
the cursor anywhere in the relevant paragraph. As an alternative you can mark some of
the text on the paragraph.
- To cancel or change the assignment of a Paragraph Style Sheet in several paragraphs,
mark the paragraphs. It is only necessary to mark a part of each paragraph, marking all
the paragraphs completely is unnecessary.

170
Working with Style Sheets

- To cancel the assignment of a Layout Style Sheet that has been applied to the whole text,
place the cursor anywhere in the text.
- If you use several layouts in the text and want to cancel or change the assignment of one
Layout Style sheet, place the cursor anywhere in the Layout.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Choose the entry None in the menu Text/Character Style Sheet or Text/Paragraph Style
Sheet or Text/Layout Style Sheet to cancel the assignment, or choose another Style Sheet.
- Click the entry None in the Style Sheets palette to cancel the assignment, or click another
Style Sheet.

Cancel or change a Text Style Sheet assignment automatically:


1. Choose one of the following options:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + F (Windows/Linux) or Command + F (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Text > Search & Replace.
2. In the Search section, choose a Style Sheet Type:
- Choose the option Character Style Sheet if you want to search for a Character Style Sheet.
- Choose the option Paragraph Style Sheet if you want to search for a Paragraph Style Sheet.
- Choose the option Layout Style Sheet if you want to search for a Layout Style Sheet.
3. Choose the Style Sheet you want to search for.
4. In the Replace section, choose the option None, either for Style Sheets of the same type or for
Style Sheets of a different type. In this way you can for example search for the usage of a
Paragraph Style Sheet and there cancel all assignments of Character Style Sheets.

Editing Style Sheets


You can rename, duplicate or delete Style Sheets.

Renaming Style Sheets


You can rename individually named Style Sheets at any time. Renaming Style Sheets whose
names are in square brackets is not permitted. Therefore when naming your Style sheets
individually, please avoid the use of square brackets. The dafault names in square brackets can
also not be renamed.

Rename Style Sheets:


1. Choose one of the following options:
- Select the menu command Edit/Style Sheets.
- Alternatively, click in the Style Sheets Palette and select the option Edit in the context
menu.
171 2. Click the Style Sheet name so that it is marked/highlighted with a blinking cursor.
Working with Style Sheets

3. Enter the new name and complete your entry by pressing the Return key or by choosing
another Style Sheet. Confirm your choice by clicking OK.

Duplicate Style Sheets:


1. Choose one of the following options:
- Select the menu command Edit/Style Sheets.
- Right click in the Style Sheets Palette and choose the option Edit in the context menu.
2. Click the Style Sheet symbol (if necessary) and click the Duplicate button.
3. Enter the new name.
4. Choose the required settings and confirm by clicking OK.

Delete one or more Style Sheets:


1. Choose one of the following options:
- Select the menu command Edit/Style Sheets.
- Right click on any Style Sheet in the Style Sheets Palette and choose the option Edit in the
context menu.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Click the Style Sheet symbol of a Style sheet you want to delete and press the Del key to
delete the individual Style Sheet.
- Click the Clear All button to delete all the Style sheets that are not used in the document.
3. Confirm your settings by clicking OK.
All Style Sheets assigned in the document are locked and cannot be deleted until the
assignment has been cancelled.

172
Working with Tables
Working with Tables

Working with Tables


A table is a collection and display of text, picture and graphic objects in the
form of rows, columns and cells. All horizontal cells are seen as rows, while all
vertical cells are seen as columns. Each cell may be a text, picture or graphic
object. The program offers extensive functions for the creation, management
and display of table objects. Below is a brief overview:

- A table can have any number of rows and columns.


- A table cell can contain text, an image, another table, a graphic object
or an object group.
- Table cells can be extended over several columns and rows.
- The widths and heights of table columns and rows may be fixed or var-
iable. With variable values, the width and height are oriented on the
cell content.
- Table columns, rows and cells can have individual separator lines,
background colors and Style Sheets.
- A cell can have different indents on each side.
- Cell content can be rotated in 90 degree steps.

Create Tables
Create a table object:
1. Choose the Table tool in the Toolbar.
2. Click at the position where the object should be displayed and hold down the mouse button.
3. Keeping the mouse button held down, drag the mouse in any direction.
4. Release the mouse button when the object has the required Width.
5. Define the number of columns and rows required in the Create Table dialog.
6. If default Character, Paragraph and Layout Style Sheets for the cells have already been created,
these may now be defined in the dialog.
7. Complete your settings by clicking OK.

174
Working with Tables

The table will now be displayed with the number of columns and rows you have set. The follow-
ing default settings will be applied:
- The table size (width and height) will be set to Auto.
- The column width will be set to Manual. At the same time the program calculates the column
width so that all columns have the same width.
- The row height will also be set to Auto. Here the program recognizes a minimum height for
all rows and calculates an initial height for the table object.
- The content of all cells is set to Text.
- All Text cells will be assigned Style Sheets as they are defined in the Create Table dialog.
- All rows, columns and cells are transparent and the table object has a frame.
- The separator lines between columns and rows are switched off.

Selecting table rows, columns and cells


To select rows, columns and cells, you must activate the table mode.

Activate Table mode:


1. Move the mouse pointer over the table until the table pointer is displayed (a white cross).
2. Click the mouse button. When Table mode is activated,
- the Table menu will be displayed,
- the appropriate cell will be marked,
- bars will appear on the left and the top of the table object. The row numbers are dis-
played on the left, while the columns are assigned letters.
To activate the table mode for a table object that is part of a group, the group mode must be
deactivated, unless you want to ungroup the group.

Leave Table mode:


Choose one of the following options to leave Table mode:
- Click in an unselected cell.
- Position the mouse pointer on the object frame to select the table object and click the
mouse button when the graphic pointer appears.
- Click anywhere in the document window where there is no object.

175
Working with Tables

Select a table cell:


1. Position the mouse pointer at the edge of the cell until the Table pointer appears.
2. Click the mouse button.
3. If necessary, use the arrow keys to navigate to and select the required cell.

Select several table cells:


1. Activate Table mode as described above.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Holding down the mouse button, drag the mouse over several connected table cells.
- Hold down the Shift key and click additional cells to select several connected or uncon-
nected cells.

Select one or more table rows:


1. Activate Table mode.
2. Position the mouse pointer in the row bar on the left, so that the mouse pointer changes to
an arrow.
3. Choose one of the following options:
- Click the mouse button to select an individual row.
- Holding down the mouse button, drag the mouse over several rows that are connected to
each other.
- Hold down the Shift key and click additional rows to select several connected or uncon-
nected rows.

Select one or more table columns:


1. Activate Table mode.
2. Position the mouse pointer in the column bar at the top, so that the mouse pointer changes
to an arrow.
3. Choose one of the following options:
- Click the mouse button to select an individual column.
- Holding down the mouse button, drag the mouse over several columns that are con-
nected to each other.
- Hold down the Shift key and click additional columns to select several connected or
unconnected columns.
If during the selection you hold down the Shift key, you can select rows, columns and cells
simultaneously.

176
Working with Tables

Editing table rows and columns


Defining row height and column width
You can define row height and column width interactively or using dialogs.

Define row height or column width interactively:


1. Activate Table mode.
2. Position the mouse pointer on a separator line for rows or columns until the mouse pointer
changes into a double arrow.
3. Hold down the mouse button.
4. With the mouse button held down, drag the mouse in the required direction to increase or
reduce the row height or column width.

Define row height or column width numerically:


1. Activate Table mode.
2. Select a cell in the line or column that you want to change.
3. Choose one of the following options:
- Choose the menu command Table > Column and Row Settings.
- Choose the command Column and Row Settings in the Context menu.
4. Choose one of the following options in the fields Width and/or Height:
- Choose the option Manual and enter a value in the entry field if the row/column should
be given a fixed height/width.
- Choose the option Auto if the row/column should be calculated automatically according
to the cell content.
- Choose the option Percent and enter a value in the entry field between 1% and 20.000% if
the row/column should be given a proportional height/width.
Notes for row height and column width
- Through an increase in the row height or column width it may occur that rows or columns
are no longer shown. In this case you can either increase the size of the table object or
change the row and/or column settings.
- hrough an decrease in the row height or column width it may occur that after the last
row/column an empty space appears. In this case you can either decrease the size of the
table object or change the row and/or column settings..
- The use of percentage values simplifies the calculation for the user. If for example the
width of a table with three columns should be shared on a basis of 3:1:1, the column
widths can be entered as 300%, 100% and 100% respectively. An entry of 60%, 20% and
20% would of course achieve the same result, but requires calculation from the user.

177
Working with Tables

Hiding rows and columns


You can hide rows and columns by setting the row height or column width to 0 mm or reduce
them interactively until the row or column disappears completely. you can see from the numbers
and letters in the row and column bars which rows and columns have been hidden.

Inserting/Adding rows and columns


You can insert single rows and columns in the middle of the table or add several rows at the
bottom or columns on the right.

Insert a row or column:


1. Activate Table mode.
2. Choose a row or column before which the new row or column should be inserted.
3. Mark/select the row or column as previously described.
4. Choose one of the following options:
- Choose the menu command Table > Insert Row or Table > Insert Column.
- Choose the command Insert Row or Insert Column in the Context menu.

Add one or more rows and/or columns:


1. Activate Table mode.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Choose the menu command Table > Table Settings.
- Choose the command Table Settings in the Context menu.
3. Increase the number of columns and/or rows in the dialog and confirm by clicking OK.

Delete/Remove a column or row:


1. Activate Table mode.
2. Select the row or column to be deleted.
3. Choose one of the following options:
- Choose the menu command Table > Remove Row or Table > Remove Column.
- Choose the command Remove Row or Remove Column in the Context menu.

Delete/Remove one or more rows and/or columns:


1. Activate Table mode.
2. Choose one of the following options:
- Choose the menu command Table > Table Settings.
- Choose the command Table Settings in the Context menu.

178 3. Reduce the number of columns and/or rows in the dialog confirm by clicking OK.
Working with Tables

Editing table cells


Extend cells
You can extend cells into neghboring rows and columns to create one big cell. This option is
particularly helpful if for example you want to create table headers that stretch over several
columns.

Extend cells:
1. Activate Table mode.
2. Select a cell.
3. Choose one of the following options:
- Choose the menu command Table > Cell Settings.
- Choose the command Cell Settings in the Context menu.
4. In the fields Columns and Rows enter values to define by how many columns and/or rows
the cell should be extended. With this extension function the program recognizes all col-
umns to the right of and all rows below the selected cell. The maximum extension follows up
to the last column and/or row.

Merge cells
The function Merge cells ipresents another possibility for extending cells. You may already
know this function from Excel or another table calculation program.

Merge cells:
1. Activate Table mode.
2. Mark several cells (at least two) in the row or column.
3. Choose one of the following options:
- Choose the menu command Table > Merge Cells.
- Choose the command Merge Cells in the Context menu.

Split merged cells:


1. Activate Table mode.
2. Mark the cells that have been merged.
3. Choose one of the following options:
- Choose the menu command Table > Split merged cells.
- Choose the command Split merged cells in the Context menu.

179
Working with Tables

Cell Indents
You can define indents for every cell in the table. This option is particularly helpful if you need
to define an offset between separator lines and cell content.

Define cell indents:


1. Activate Table mode.
2. Select a cell.
3. Choose one of the following options:
- Choose the menu command Table > Cell Settings.
- Choose the command Cell Settings in the Context menu.
4. In the Indents section of the dialog, choose the options Left, Right, Top or Bottom and enter
a value as required for each side.

Cell content
In a newly created table the content of all cells is set to Text. These cells behave just like a sigle
text object. As with all objects you can change the content of a cell at any time. Thus a cell may
contain an image or even another table.

Define cell content:


1. Activate Table mode.
2. Select a cell.
3. Choose one of the following options:
- Choose the menu command Table > Cell Content.
- Choose the command Cell Content in the Context menu.
4. Choose one of the following options:
- Choose the option None if the cell should have no content. In cells of this type any
objects can be inserted.
- Choose the option Text if the cell should contain text. In a text cell you have all the
options that are available in a text object in Text mode.
- Choose the option Picture if the cell should contain an image. In a picture cell you have
all the options that are available in a picture object in Picture mode.
- Choose the option Table if the cell should contain an additional table. For this table all
the settings in Table mode are valid, with the exception of the width and height, which
are based on the height and width of the cell.

180
Working with Tables

Cell alignment
You can define a horizontal and vertical alignment for every cell. This option however only
takes effect on cells whose content option is None.

Define cell alignment:


1. Activate Table mode.
2. Select a cell.
3. Choose one of the following options:
- Choose the menu command Table > Cell Settings.
- Choose the command Cell Settings in the Context menu.
4. Choose one of the following options:
- In the Alignment section, choose the options Left, Center or Right to align the cell content
horizontally.
- In the Alignment section, choose the options Top, Center or Bottom to align the cell con-
tent vertically.

Define cell rotation:


1. Activate Table mode.
2. Select a text cell and type a few characters.
3. Choose one of the following options:
- Choose the menu command Table > Cell Settings.
- Choose the command Cell Settings in the Context menu.
4. Choose one of the options 0°, 90°, 180° or 270°.
5. Click OK to confirm.
6. Try the same option with a picture cell to rotate the picture.
Note:
The picture rotation in the Module palette has no effect on a picture cell in a table. To achieve
an individual rotation, you must place a picture object in a cell with no content (graphic)
and set the desired rotation. This involves a lot of calculation which will slow down the pro-
gram quite dramatically, so where possible it should be avoided.

181
Working with Tables

Enter/import text in tables


When you have created your table to your requirements, you can start entering your text man-
ually in the cells. Please note that in the Preferences (Pages & Objects, Objects tab) the option
Use Tab Key to Navigate in Table is activated as default. This means that the entry of a tab will
cause the cursor to jump to the next available cell.

Navigation in Tables:
1. Make sure that the tab key option as described above is actually activated.
2. Click the first cell in the table.
3. Navigate in the table as follows:
- Press the Tab key to navigate forwards from left to right.
- Press the keys Shift + Tab to navigate backwards.

Import text into tables


You can import text into any text cell or group of cells. For this a single cell must be activated
in Text mode, or several cells must be marked.

Import text into a cell:


1. Move the mouse over the cell so that the text pointer (I-Beam) is displayed.
2. Click the cell so that the cursor blinks in the cell.
3. Choose a suitable option to import a text file:
- Press the shortcut keys Strg + E (Windows/Linux) bzw. Befehl + E (Mac).
- Choose the menu command File > Import.
4. Choose a *.txt- or an *.rtf file from the dialog.
5. Click Open. The text will be imported into the cell.
It may occur that after the import the graphic appearance of the cell does not change and that
a text overflow symbol is displayed. Save the document and then choose the menu command
File > Revert to saved. Alternatively you can go to the row settings as described above and con-
firm the settings without making any changes.
Note:
When you import *.txt files, the program will open the dialog Select Text Encoding. In this
dialog you can choose the encoding for the text file you want to import.
When you import *.rtf files whose text has various attributes, then these too will be imported
as far as is possible.
You can import tab stop separated text in a table object in VivaDesigner using the Copy-Paste
process, so that columns and rows are filled, and even added to if necessary.

182
Working with Tables

Import tab stop separated text:


1. Open the required file in in MS-Excel or in a text editor.
2. Mark the whole text and choose the command Copy.
3. Return to VivaDesigner and activate the Table mode as described above.
4. Select/mark the cell where the imported text will start. Alternatively, mark the cells to be
considered for the import, or mark all the cells.
5. Import the copied text:
- Press the shortcut keys Ctrl + V (Windows/Linux) or Command + V (Mac).
- Choose the menu command Edit > Paste.
- Choose the command Paste in the Context menu.
6. Choose an option from each of the areas Merged Cells/Non-Text Content and Additional Col-
umns/Rows in the Import Tab Text dialog:
- Merge & Suppress Content / Beware Table – with this option you define that only suffi-
cient text will be imported to completely fill the table. All following text characters will
be suppressed. For this option all the cells should be marked.
- Merge & Suppress Content / Insert New Columns/Rows – with this option you define that
new columns and/or rows will be created in the table in order to import the complete
text. It may be that text copied from Excel or another table application will have an
additional row which must be removed manually from the table.
- Suppress Content / Beware Table – with this option you define that only sufficient text
will be imported to completely fill the table. All following text characters will be sup-
pressed.
- Suppress Content / Insert New Columns/Rows – with this option you define that new col-
umns and/or rows will be created in the table in order to import the complete text. It
may be that text copied from Excel or another table application will have an additional
row which must be removed manually from the table.
- Keep Content / Beware Table – with this option you define that only sufficient text will be
imported to completely fill the table. All following text characters will be suppressed.
- Keep Content / Insert New Columns/Rows – with this option you define that new columns
and/or rows will be created in the table in order to import the complete text. It may be
that text copied from Excel or another table application will have an additional row
which must be removed manually from the table.

183
Working with Tables

Graphic attributes for Tables


Tables are objects and as such can be treated in the same way as any other other objects. This
means that they may have a frame and a fill color, which may also be a blend. You can set the
frame and the fill color in the Table tab of the Table Settings dialog, or in the Module palette in
Object mode or in the Object Settings dialog.

Colors for cells, rows and columns


The appearance of your table can be adapted according to taste and preference. Different col-
ors may be applied to cells, rows and columns as you like, but before you start adapting your
table, the following points must be considered:
- Row colors take precedence over column colors.
- Cell colors take precedence over row and column colors.
- If columns/rows are left with the default setting [White] + Transparent, any fill color and/or
shade that is applied to the table object will be visible in the transparent elements.

Spacers
Spacers may be applied to each individual cell or group of cells. You may well be familiar with
the spacer/grid principle from Excel or other table calculation programs.
The graphic attributes of spacers are edited in the Spacers tab of the Table Settings dialog and
carry the same default settings as the object frame for graphic objects or for line objects. The
table frame is not included in the specification, so if for example you select only the top left
cell, the program will offer you the opportunity to set a Right Spacer and a Bottom Spacer.
The most simple option is to create a table consisting of a grid wherby the Spacers all take the
default option.

Create table with standard grid:


1. Create a table with several columns and rows.
2. Mark the whole table.
3. Do one of the following:
- Choose the menu command Table > Show Spacers.
- Choose the command Show Spacers in the Context menu.
The table will now be displayed with its grid.

Edit the grid:


1. Mark the whole table.
2. Do one of the following:
- Choose the menu command Table > Spacer Settings.
- Choose the command Spacer Settings in the Context menu.
184 3. Set the Spacer options for the Horizontal Spacer and the Vertical Spacer.
Working with Tables

Switch grid off:


1. Mark the whole table.
2. Do one of the following:
- Choose the menu command Table > Hide Spacers.
- Choose the command Hide Spacers in the Context menu.

Define Spacers for individual cells, columns or rows:


1. Create a table with several columns and rows.
2. Mark the cell(s), row or column to which you want to apply a Spacer.
3. Do one of the following:
- Choose the menu command Table > Spacer Settings.
- Choose the command Spacer Settings in the Context menu.
4. Click the required Spacer options to Yes and define the Left, Right, Top and Bottom Spacers
and/or Horizontal Spacer/Vertical Spacer as available and according to your requirements.
You may have decided to have the Vertical Spacer in red and the Horizontal Spacer in black.
Depending on your requirements, you can choose one of the options Horizontal Spacer above
or Vertical Spacer above from the Table tab in the Table Settings dialog. The option you choose
defines which Spacers will be output on top, i.e. above the others.

185
Exchange with InDesign
Exchange with InDesign

Exchange with InDesign


With the “IDML” module, you can exchange documents between VivaDesigner
and the layout program “InDesign” on the basis of the IDML format. VivaDesigner
can import documents in IDML format and also save them in IDML format
according to the version in use. Both VivaDesigner and InDesign offer very
comprehensive tools for layout and typography. With regard to functionality,
both programs are similar, but there are however both conceptual and func-
tional differences that are mostly to be found in the detail.

Introduction
It would be going too far to examine all the differences in detail. In this chapter we have tried
to explain the most important points that should be considered when transferring data.
A general rule of thumb is that you should always compare an imported or exported document
with the original. Whether you have to edit a document in VivaDesigner or in InDesign depends
on the complexity and the construction of the document. It is possible in many cases to take
over the documents “one to one” with their original without having to edit them further. If you
are planning a regular exchange between VivaDesigner and InDesign, please refer to VIVA with
appropriate example documents. VIVA will on requirement make a corresponding feasibility
analysis and advises customers on such projects. The same goes for users who have questions
and problems regarding the import of data.
Note:
The import and export of IDML files follows on the basis of the VivaXML AddIn. If your pro-
gram does not possess a licence for the VivaXML AddIn, you cannot import any files in IDML
format. Users of a “Free Edition” can import files in IDML format, but cannot export or save
any files in IDML format.

General tips for import


With the IDML import module, you can import Adobe InDesign documents in IDML format with
effect from Version 6 (CS4) and edit them in VivaDesigner. When importing IDML files, all
pages, the page format and all closed text and picture objects with content and all lines will be
imported. Furthermore, all colors and style sheets will also be imported.

Documents and pages


VivaDesigner imports all document and master pages, including the names of the master
pages, page numbering and page order, and at the same time takes over the name of the orig-
inal file.
With effect from Adobe InDesign Version 7 (CS5), it is possible to define several page formats in
one document. These different page formats will not be taken over.

187
Exchange with InDesign

Objects
VivaDesigner imports all closed rectangular and oval graphic, text and picture objects as well
as lines and multiple lines.
- For all imported objects, all co-ordinates, rotation, transparencies (incl. opacity), colors,
frames (outline) will be taken over correctly. Since both programs contain differing line
types, only some line types can be taken over.
- For all imported picture objects, the scaling, position and rotation in the picture object will
be taken over.
- For all imported text objects, the number of columns, the gutter, the text indent and the
options for the first baseline will all be taken over.
- Guide lines will be taken over as guide objects.
- Text on lines and some special paths will not be taken over.
- The option Text Wrap is also taken over, but may in some cases have a different effect.
When wrapping text, InDesign works differently from VivaDesigner and most other layout
programs. With Text Wrap all text objects that lie underneath in the hierarchy are calcu-
lated. with InDesign it is not the hierarchy that is considered, but just the surface, no mat-
ter what hierarchy these objects have. Therefore, in InDesign, for objects positioned over
another object with the option Text Wrap, the additional option Ignore Text Wrap must be
selected. In VivaDesigner no option needs to be selected for this. Therefore when import-
ing into VivaDesigner those text objects will also be displayed where in InDesign the
option Ignore Text Wrap was not selected.
- When exporting to InDesign, VivaDesigner currently does not set the option Ignore Text
Wrap. Text objects lying over other objects that have the option Text Wrap selected may
therefore possibly not be displayed. In this case the user must set the option manually.
- In Version 7.1 of VivaDesigner, objects are placed correctly on their corresponding layers.
An additional option allows ll objects to be placed on the first layer if required.

Text and typography


Character and paragraph attributes
VivaDesigner imports all text from closed rectangular and oval text objects and takes over the
following attributes:
Character attributes – Font family, font face, font size, color, style (superior and inferior, capi-
tal letters, Small Caps, underline, strikethrough, both automatic and manual), character spac-
ing (kerning), character width and height.
Paragraph attributes – Alignment (left/right, centered, justified, forced justified), indent (left,
right, paragraph indent), tabs, line spacing (leading), space before/after, Widows & Orphans,
paragraph rules, drop caps and hyphenation.

188
Exchange with InDesign

Here the following must be taken into consideration: VivaDesigner prior to Version 7 worked
exclusively character-oriented. Therefore it was possible to define indents or line spacing easily
within a paragraph. This possibility pleased typographers and designers, but with most users it
led to misunderstandings. The benefit of this flexibility was less than the work involved for the
user. VIVA therefore changed this concept in Version 7. VivaDesigner now works, like InDesign,
with separate character and paragraph attributes, and also offers the so-called layout attri-
bute, with which the number of columns and the alignment of a text section within a text frame
may be defined. The separation of character and paragraph attributes is identical in both pro-
grams with one exception: InDesign treats line spacing as a character attribute, while
VivaDesigner 7 now treats it as a paragraph attribute.
Differing line spacing (leading) in a paragraph will be ignored with one exception when
importing: If in InDesign a paragraph has a manual line break after which a new leading was
set, the line break is replaced with a paragraph break on import.

Text overflow
In the calculation and adaptation of a text object, InDesign ignores the descenders as default.
This means that for InDesign the last baseline determines the height of the text object. This
option may be set in VivaDesigner, and for reasons of compatibility it is switched on by default
when importing. There may however still be a text overflow after importing the document, if
exactly the same font on the same platform has not been used. Even if this conditioner is fulfil-
led, a text overflow may occur, as the two programs calculate the word spacing differently or
use marginally different values for the font information. To solve this problem, the program
provides options to adapt the height of text objects. Please refer to the section Importing an
IDML file.

Breaks
Every typesetting program has its own internal and mostly secret rules for defining a line or a
paragraph. Furthermore, InDesign and VivaDesigner work with different hyphenation algo-
rithms and suppliers of dictionaries. VivaDesigner hyphenates German text on the basis of the
DUDEN dictionary, and in addition offers text break qualities that InDesign does not recognize.
Therefore it is most probable that the text breaks in the two programs will not be identical. In
many cases this is not a problem, as the differences are mostly minimal. In individual cases this
may still be a problem, for which reason we recommend that documents are compared, espe-
cially if no additional editing is to follow.

Line spacing
Since Version 7, line spacing in Viva Designer is a paragraph attribute. In InDesign line spacing
is a character attribute. When importing only the line spacing will be set that was applied at
the beginning of the paragraph. All other line spacing settings will be ignored by VivaDesigner.

189
Exchange with InDesign

Anchored (floating) objects


Objects anchored in the text are currently ignored (apart from tables). This function will be
provided in a later version.

Hyphenation
When importing, hyphenation settings (hyphens in a row, minimum before and minimum after)
will be taken over. Both programs provide additional options that the other program does not
possess. In VivaDesigner this is the setting for the hyphenation quality (e.g. word stems), in
InDesign it may be defined that the last word in a column may not be hyphenated. In addition,
the two programs have different suppliers of hyphenation dictionaries. This fact can, depending
on the document, lead to an altered text break, in some cases to a text overflow.

Images
Preview
Like most layout programs, Adobe InDesign also normally saves a preview of imported images
in the document. The path is also saved in which the original file is to be found. When the doc-
ument is exported to the IDML format, the path information is retained, but the image preview
is lost as Adobe InDesign does’t save any binary data in this format. If the IDML file is opened in
VivaDesigner, the program tries to create a preview for the appropriate picture objects. For this
purpose, it needs access to the original images according to the path information saved. Since
in most cases the IDML file is opened in VivaDesigner on other computers, the paths saved are
generally not available. To solve this problem, the program provides suitable options to define
the source of the images. Please refer to the section Importing an IDML file.
If you don’t have access to the original images when importing the IDML document, you don’t
need to place all the images manually afterwards. With the option Picture Usage in the Docu-
ment menu, you can also relink automatically at any time after importing. As soon as the link
has been made, VivaDesigner creates the appropriate preview. At the same time the information
regarding the picture scaling, offset and rotation within the picture object that were saved in
the IDML format are retained!

Formats
VivaDesigner supports the current image formats TIFF, EPS/LAY, JPG, PDF/AI, CT, BMP and PNG.
The following information must be considered:
- The native Photoshop format PSD is not supported, as Adobe no longer publishes the file
format for current versions. If images in the PSD format were placed in InDesign docu-
ments, VivaDesigner will not import these files. In this case you must save the image file in
another format.

190
Exchange with InDesign

- EPS bitmap images are output in high resolution in all output formats, EPS vector graphics
are only output in high resolution in PostScript. We therefore recommend avoiding the use
of vector graphics in EPS format and using vector images in PDF format instead. The bene-
fit of the PDF format lies in the higher preview quality in VivaDesigner.

Tables
InDesign and VivaDesigner are able to create tables, but in different ways: While InDesign can
only display a table in a text object, a table in VivaDesigner is an independent object that can
also be anchored in a text object. In VivaDesigner, tables are therefore handled in the same
way as all other anchored objects. InDesign makes an exception here, as tables always take up
a complete line. Text before or after a table in the same line is not possible. Furthermore,
InDesign ignores the preset line spacing for tables, while the attribute is applied for other
anchored objects. VivaDesigner applies this with the appropriate options in an anchored table
object.
The fact that tables in InDesign may be larger than the text object presents a problem. Thus a
table of 100 x 100 mm may be created, while the text object it belongs to is only 5x5 mm. When
taking over tables from InDesign, the program checks whether the content of a text object con-
sists exclusively of a table. In this case, the program replaces the text frame with the table
through an appropriate table object. If the text object contains further text in addition to the
table, then the width of the table object will be constrained to the maximum width of the text
object.

Colors
InDesign and VivaDesigner manage colors by using a color name and an appropriate color def-
inition. Both programs provide predefined base colors, which may not be changed: Black,
White, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Registration. Furthermore, the user may either create his
own colors from different models (CMYK, RGB, etc.) or select predefined colors from a list (e. g.
Pantone, etc.). InDesign permits a color to be applied to an element (object, text, etc.) without
the color being taken over in the color list. For management purposes these colors receive a
color name internally that is not visible to the user. They are also assigned the attribute vis-
ible=false. Since due to this method a great many colors may be created in VivaDesigner, the
program tries to reduce the number of colors and to map identical color definitions together.
For the conversion VivaDesigner carries out the following actions:
1. First of all, all standard colors (Black, Cyan, etc,) are converted to and displayed as the
standard colors of the same name in VivaDesigner ([Black], [Cyan], etc.).
2. Then all colors whose content (model and color value) corresponds to the five standard col-
ors (White, Black, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Registration ) mapped to the standard col-
ors in VivaDesigner. In this way the color C=100 M=0 Y=0 K=0 will be mapped automatically to
the standard color [Cyan].
3. Internal colors assigned the name uxx, that are invisible in InDesign (attribute vis-
ible=false), are mapped in VivaDesigner to a color with an appropriate mode and color
value.
191
Exchange with InDesign

Example:
- The InDesign color “/uc9” Mode=“Process" Space="RGB" ColorValue="255 177 0" will be
mapped in VivaDesigner to the new RGB color R255 G177 B0.
- The InDesign color “//ud5" Mode="Process" Space="CMYK" ColorValue="0 0 0 100" will
be mapped in VivaDesigner to the existing standard color [Black].
- The InDesign color “//u2749” Mode=“Process” Space=“CMYK" ColorValue=“52 0 35 32”
will be mapped in VivaDesigner to the new CMYK color C52 M0 Y35 K32.
4. Colors with an identical definition (model and color value) that occur several times in
InDesign will not be taken over, that is, they will be mapped to existing colors. These colors
with identical content appear in the IDML if in InDesign non-visible colors are used frequently.
5. Spot colors (Pantone, HKS, etc.) are taken over with their name and the corresponding CMYK
value. There is no mapping to existing color tables in VivaDesigner, as you cannot be sure
that all tables are also available in VivaDesigner or if they represent the same color values.
The spot colors also receive the same screen angle that was applied to them in InDesign.
Thus the angle 15 is applied to Cyan, 75 to Magenta, 45 to Black and 0 to Yellow. In the
angles of Cyan and Magenta InDesign and VivaDesigner differ, so that the two angles are
exchanged. Therefore the list already contains a mapping to the required screen angle.
6. Color blends (gradients) are constructed differently in InDesign and VivaDesigner. The only
thing they have in common is the fact that a blend can consist of several colors. Blends are
more complex in InDesign but cannot receive a name. When blends are imported,
VivaDesigner uses the internal name from the InDesign document. If a blend starts with a
name containing u, the program applies the term _InDesign-Blend- to make it clear that
this is not a normal color.
7. All other colors, that for example do not adhere to the RGB or CMYK standard, are not
imported at present.
8. Settings for overprint and trapping of colors are also not taken over.

Style sheets
When importing, all Paragraph Style Sheets and Character Style Sheets are taken over. This goes
both for style sheets created by the user and also for the internal style sheets that InDesign cre-
ates automatically for manually assigning to text. For the user only the style sheets are visible
in VivaDesigner that were created manually. Since the two programs follow different concepts
for the handling of style sheets, the standard style sheet will be taken over from InDesign.

Importing an IDML file


Import IDML file
1. Select the command Open in the File menu and choose the option InDesign Markup (*.IDML)
in the popup menu File Type.
2. Select an IDML file and click the Open button.
192
Exchange with InDesign

3. Choose the required options in the settings dialog (General tab) to define the assignment of
attributes to the text:
- Choose the option Apply Styles with Style Sheets if all text attributes and style sheets
should be taken over.
- Choose the option Apply Styles without Style Sheets if all text attributes should be taken
over and applied to the text, but that the style sheets should not be taken over. This
option is helpful if you want to change the organisation of the style sheets in
VivaDesigner.
- Choose the option Plain Text if plain text without any attributes is required.
4. Choose the required options in the settings dialog (General tab) to define the text breaks:
- Choose the option Remove Discretionary Hyphen if in the text all the discretionary
hyphens should be removed. This option is helpful if you don’t want to take over any
invisible hyphens that cause a text break. If the option is not selected, all discretionary
hyphens will be retained in the text.
- Choose the option Remove Forced Line Break if in the text all forced line breaks should be
removed. This option is helpful if you don’t want to take over any paragraph breaks. If
the option is not selected, all forced line breaks (soft return) will be retained in the text.
- Choose the option Convert Bullets and Numbers to Text if lists in the text should be con-
verted to plain text. The list attributes can be reapplied in VivaDesigner as required, if
necessary using Style Sheets. For further information on this subject, please refer to the
chapter entitled Bullets and Numbering.
- Choose the option Import Footnotes to import all the footnotes contained in the IDML
document. If the option is not selected, the footnotes will be ignored.Choose the option
Increase Text Object Height by if all text objects should be increased in height by an
individual value. This option is helpful if for example in InDesign the height of the text
objects has been adapted to the amount of text. Depending on the font used, it may be
that on importing the last line of a text object can no longer be displayed, because the
height calculation works differently in the two programs. In most cases an increase of 0.1
mm (0.283pt) is sufficient to solve the problem. If the option is not selected, the height
of the text object defined in InDesign will be retained. The overflow symbol shows that
not all the text can be displayed in the text object.
5. Choose the required options in the settings dialog (General tab) to define which path the
program should use for images:
- Choose the option Use Image Paths From IDML if you have access to the paths that were
used to import the images into InDesign.
- Choose the option Use Document Path Including Subfolders if the images are in the same
folder as the IDML file. With this option, the subfolders of the selected folder will also be
checked.
- Choose the option Select Custom Path if you want to define explicitly in which folder the
images are to be found. With this option, the subfolders of the selected folder will also be
checked.

193
Exchange with InDesign

6. Choose the required options in the settings dialog (Options tab) to define how further edit-
ing of the documents will be optimized:
- Choose the option Don’t Import Lines without Line Width if only lines with a line width
should be imported.
- Choose the option Convert Empty Text Objects to Graphic Objects if empty text objects
are to be converted to graphic objects for easier editing.
- Choose the option Convert Empty Image Objects to Graphic Objects if empty picture
objects are to be converted to graphic objects for easier editing.
- Choose the option Flatten Layers to flatten layers to one layer for easier editing.
- Choose the option Ignore Guidelines if guidelines should not be imported.
- Choose the option Increase Text Object Width to Table Object Width if text objects con-
taining a table as a floating object should be enlarged for easier editing.
- Choose the option Increase Table Cell Height by if all cells in a table should be increased
in height by an individual value. This option is helpful if for example in InDesign the
height of the table cells has been adapted to the amount of text. Here the same princi-
ples apply as with the option Increase Text Object Height by.
7. When you have chosen all the options you need, click OK to open the IDML document.

General Tips for Export (w.e.f. Version 8)


Generally InDesign takes over all pages, colors, layers and objects with an accuracy of 1/1000 pt
or millimeter. Scaling and cropping of images are both taken over correctly. With PDFs the
InDesign Option Crop Box is used automatically.
You can therefore convert VivaDesigner documents almost loss-free and without further edit-
ing to InDesign, providing you adhere to specific aspects, particularly with regard to text:
1. In the Preferences -> Text -> Text Lines -> Method, choose the Option Font Size. This method
corresponds largely to the method with which InDesign calculates line spacing.
2. Switch off the option Optical Alignment in VivaDesigner, which is set to Automatic by
default. With this option, the surface for text display in VivaDesigner is enlarged, which
means that the text may extend beyond the edge of the text object, depending on the char-
acter in question (e.g. the letter A) or is fixed to the beginning or end of the text object
(e.g. the letter H). In InDesign, however, the surface for text display is reduced. Therefore
with text objects that are calculated exactly on the width of the text, text overflow may
appear in InDesign.
3. If you set text indents in style sheets, the value for the first line AND the following lines
should be set. Therefore you should avoid setting only the indent for the first line in Style
Sheet “A” and setting only the indent for following lines in Style Sheet “B”.
4. In VivaDesigner, avoid options that are not available in InDesign: Character Background,
Character Frame, Paragraph Background, Paragraph Frame, hyphenation quality, text writ-
ing direction, Baseline Orientation, Line Counter, outline drop caps, drop cap indents, Lay-
outs, Layout Style Sheets, Layout spacing as well as special Footnote and Endnote options.
194
Exchange with InDesign

5. Avoid using options in VivaDesigner that are not available in every version of InDesign or
are not exported by VivaDesigner(e.g. Change Tracking in VivaDesigner).
6. VIVA works permanently on improving the exchange with InDesign. If you find errors, have
suggestions or questions regarding the exchange, you are welcome to contact us at any
time. We are grateful for any hints or tips we may receive.

Exporting an IDML file


Export IDML file
1. Select the command Save As in the File menu and choose the option InDesign Markup
(*.IDML) in the popup menu File Type.
2. Select a folder, enter a file name and click the Save button.
3. Choose the required options in the IDML Export Options dialog:
- Choose the option Use Image Paths From Document if you have access to the paths that
were used to import the images to VivaDesigner.

- Choose the option Replace Image Path Prefix if you have no access to the paths that were
used to import the images to VivaDesigner, or if the paths cannot be used on another
operating system. This option is particularly helpful if for example you want to replace
Windows paths with Mac OS paths.
- Choose the option Select Custom Path if you want to define explicitly with which path all
existing paths should be replaced.

195
Package & Send
Package and Send

Package and Send


With the “Package & Send” option, you can create a copy of your document
with all the images and fonts used and optionally send this copy to a third
party. For this process you do NOT need any compression, E-Mail or FTP pro-
grams, and no access data to the recipient’s servers are needed.With this
technology you can exchange data with your service provider very simply.

Create a package
The program packs a copy of the document with the images and fonts used on a package. This
package can be either a folder or a compressed file in the ZIP format.
Note:
The program saves the current status of the file in the copy. Therefore the copy that is cre-
ated may not be identical with the original file if you didn‘t save the document just before!
You can unpack a ZIP file with the tools in your operating systems. Normally you do not need
any additional programs.
1. Select the menu command File > Package & Send.
2. Define the package content:
- Choose the Document option to save a copy of the document in the package.
- Choose the Images option to save copies of all the document images used in the package.
This option is not available if the option Embed All Used Images in the Prefrenences is
selected (w.e.f. version 8.0).
- Choose the Fonts option to save copies of all the document fonts used in the package.
- Choose the Document Report option to create a text file listing the document content
(images, fonts, colors, etc).
3. (Optional) Choose the option Save Package.
4. Choose one of the following options for the target folder:
- Choose the option In Document Folder if the package should be saved in the folder where
the original document is saved.
- Choose the option User Defined Folder if the package should be saved in another folder.
Then click the Select button and choose a folder.
5. Choose the option ZIP Package if the package content should be compressed to a ZIP file.
6. Click the Package Only button.

197
Package and Send

Note:
- The program only collects those images which have been imported/linked correctly (a)and
are physically available (b). If one of these conditions is not fulfilled, these images will not
be collected. Example: Images from the Clipboard are correctly linked (a), but are not to be
found as a physical image file (b). Images which are physically available (b), but not
linked correctly (a), will also not be collected.
- If all images are embedded (b), then no images will be collected (w.e.f. version 8.0). In this
case the option for collecting imgaes will not be available.
- The name of the folder or the ZIP file corresponds to the document name. If the option is
used several times, existing packages (folders or ZIP files) will not be overwritten, but
will be saved with a number appended. If for example the name of the folder or ZIP file
ends with “-3”, the option has been carried out three times. If old versions are deleted, the
program automatically fills the resulting gaps.

Send a package
1. Choose the required options for the package content.
2. (Optional) Choose the option Save Package if you want to save the package as well.
3. (Optional) Choose the option ZIP Package if the data saved should be compressed. To trans-
fer data this is not necessary as the data are always transferred in compressed form.
4. Choose one of the following options:
- Click the Send Only button to send the package if you have not selected the option Save
Package.
- Click the Package & Send button if you have selected the option Save Package.
Please study the legal information provided by the program regarding the copying of fonts.
The program starts the VIVA File Sender automatically. VIVA File Sender is a separate program
that transfers the data to the recipient. During the transfer you can continue working with
VivaDesigner.
5. In the Welcome dialog, click the Continue button.
In the Recipient section all recipients are displayed who have installed a profile for you.
Note:
If you want to send data to a service provider who does not appear in the list, please refer to
your service provider. VIVA creates profiles for service providers on request.
6. In the Recipient section, choose the recipient to whom the package should be sent. In the
Files section you can check if the program has collected all data/files correctly.
Note:
The Recipient VIVA Support Team is usually installed as standard and enables you to send
your documents directly to VIVA Support.
Technical Note:
If in the Files section of the dialog no files are displayed to be sent, it may be that the pro-
gram is still trying to build a connection to the VIVA Server, but has not yet received a reply.
The files will not be displayed until the program has received the necessary reply from the
VIVA Server. In this case please refer to the section Technical Info for Administrators.
198 The program also saves a package temporarily on your computer if you just want to send it.
Package and Send

7. Choose one of the following options:


- If the recipient profile demands NO further information, click Send.
- If the recipient profile demands further information, click Continue. Enter your E-Mail
Address and a comment if necessary. Obligatory fields are shown with an asterisk “*”.
8. Click Send. The sending process will now be started. During the transfer you can continue
working with VivaDesigner.
9. Click Finish when the transfer is complete.

Sending data directly to the Recipient


You can use the VIVA File Sender to send files to a recipient directly. VIVA File Sender is a separate
program that sends data to a recipient. In contrast to previous processes, you do not need any
compression, E-Mail or FTP programs, and no access data to the recipient’s servers are needed.
1. Open the VIVA program folder on your hard drive.
2. Start the program FileSender.
3. In the Welcome dialog, click the Continue button.
4. In the Recipient section all recipients are displayed who have installed a profile for you. In
the Recipient section, choose the recipient to whom the package should be sent.
Note:
The entry VIVA Support Team is usually installed as standard and enables you to send your
documents directly to VIVA Support.
5. (Optional) Click one of the two symbols Add Files or Add Folders to add a file or a folder of
your choice. These symbols are only selectable if the profile selected enables this option.
Repeat this step if you want to add several files or folders.
6. (Optional) In the Files section you can check if the program has collected all data/files cor-
rectly. With the Delete symbol You can remove added files or folders.
7. Click Continue when the list of files to be sent is complete.
8. If the recipient profile demands further information, enter your E-Mail Address and a comment
if necessary. Obligatory fields are shown with an asterisk “*”.
9. Click Send to start the sending process.
10. Click Finish when the transfer is complete.

199
Package and Send

Install Communication Profile


The Recipient may offer the communication profile for download from his Website. The user
installs the communication profile with a simple double-click. The profile will be installed
automatically in the folder Resources/Services of the program folder. The user can of course
copy the file to this folder manually.

Installation of a Configuration Profile:


1. Double-click the file with the Configuration Profile (suffix *.vcp).
2. The program will confirm the installation with a notice.
Note:
If you have already installed a configuration profile with the same name, the program will
ask if the existing profile should be replaced.

200
Package and Send

Technical Information for Administrators


Introduction
With VivaDesigner you can send VIVA documents, the images and fonts used in them as well
as any other files to a recipient. The basis for this is the separate program VIVA File Sender,
which is included in the VivaDesigner package. In contrast to conventional processes, you do
not need any compression, E-Mail or FTP programs, or any access data to the recipient’s
servers.
With this technology, software developers, media service providers, printers or any companies
(hereafter Recipient) can provide their customers and users with a comfortable process for data
transfer.

The Communication Profile


The basis of the VIVA File Sender is a so-called communication profile. A communication profile
is a file with the suffix *.vcp. As a standard, VIVA always supplies the communication profile
VIVA Support, so that customers can send data to VIVA. Service providers can request their own
profiles from VIVA. A communication profile defines in which way data will be transferred,
which access data is needed and if a user must give his E-Mail adress and a comment before
sending. The Recipient can also define if he and/or the end customer should be notified by E-
Mail on successful transfer of the data.
After successful transfer, a certain Website may be opened as an option, for example to enable
an order process for the data transferred. Through this technology, the VIVA program can be
linked to every FTP server and Web application.
The file with the communication profile contains not the configuration itself, but only a refer-
ence to the settings, which are stored on a special VIVA website. Thus the data transfer settings
can be changed at any time without the configuration profile needing to be distributed or
reinstalled (Exception see section The Communication Protocol).

The Communication Protocol

Step 1: Settings request


When a user chooses a communication profile in VIVA File Sender, a connection with the VIVA
server (address: http://vcp.viva.de) will be made to request the settings for the data transfer
(see Step 2). From this request, the VIVA server delivers an XML with encrypted information to
the VIVA File Sender. Depending on the settings that have been defined on the VIVA server for the
communication profile chosen, the appropriate options will be displayed in the VIVA File Sender.
Communication between the VIVA File Sender and the the VIVA server to request the settings
for data transfer can happen in different ways:
HTTP Request: The default communication is made with an HTTP Request (Standard Port 80).
The data to be transferred and the options will only be displayed in the Files section when the
program has received the necessary answer from the VIVA server. In most cases, communication
with the VIVA Server takes just a few seconds. If in the Files section no data are displayed, it
201 may be that the program is still trying to connect to the VIVA server, but has still not received a
Package and Send

reply. This connection is important, as only the VIVA Server can tell the program how and
where the files should be sent. In this case please wait if necessary for several minutes.
Proxy Server: If you work in a company, it may be that Internet connections (HTTP Requests)
are only possible through a Proxy Server. The result may be that the VIVA File Sender cannot
make contact with the VIVA server. In this case no files can be transferred, even if a connection
to the Recipient could be made (see Step 2). To get around this problem, your System Adminis-
trator should if possible configure the Proxy Server in such a way that requests to the VIVA
server (http://vcp.viva.de) are not intercepted.
Alternatively, you can define a Proxy Server in VivaDesigner, which will also be used to check
for updates:

Define Proxy Settings for VivaDesigner/VIVA File Sender:


1. Choose the menu command Edit > Preferences (Windows/Linux) or VivaDesigner > Preferences
(Mac).
2. Choose the Program option and then the Updates tab.
3. Choose the option Manual Proxy Settings and enter your settings for the Proxy server.
HTTPS: Request: If communication via an HTTP Request or a Proxy Server is not possible, com-
munication may also be made via secure HTTPS Request (Standard Port 443) . The option can
only be activated by VIVA on the VIVA server. If the HTTPS option is activated on the VIVA
server, VIVA will deliver a NEW communication profile to the Recipient. The Recipient must then
supply this communication profile to his customers/users. The customers/users must install the
new communication profile. This installation is necessary, so that the VIVA File Sender knows
how it should communicate with the VIVA server. Apart from this, a user does not need to rein-
stall when the settings are changed in the profile.
Technical Note:
In a concrete customer project, the files and options in the dialog were only displayed after
several minutes. In this project, the customer uses a Proxy Server and in VivaDesigner NO
manual Proxy settings were made. There could be several reasons for this delay:
1. The Firewall may have been able to analyze the XML returned by the VIVA server, which
could explain the resulting time delay.
2. It is possible that some network configurations react in a sensitive way if HTTP Requests
were sent that do not come from a browser and therefore possess no browser ID. You can
easily test whether such an effect will appear in your system by opening a communication
profile in an editor and copying the URL contained in it to a browser. If the browser dis-
plays the result immediately, the problem could be the missing browser ID. If the browser
only displays the result after a long time, this points to a network problem. In this case,
please check your network configuration.
Step 2: Data transfer
Communication between the VIVA File Sender and the Recipient’s server follows via the standard
FTP Protocol (Port 21, passive, with user/login data). These Ports must be open for the communi-
cation.

202

You might also like